Graduate Employment Rate Soars at University of Worcester

Thursday, 12 July 2018

Graduates from the University of Worcester are being snapped up into the work place with record high employment rates, new figures reveal.

The Higher Education Statistics Agency has released its latest employment figures, which show that 97% of Worcester graduates are in full-time employment or further study within six months of graduation. Traditionally, it takes some time for graduates to enter highly skilled employment but this year the proportion of graduates taking up highly skilled ‘graduate-level’ jobs within the first six months is over 75% - an increase of 5.8% in a single year. Yet again, Worcester’s employment rate is higher than the national university average.

This latest accolade comes after the University Worcester was ranked in the top 10 in the Country for sustained employment, with or without further study, one, three and five years after graduation, according to the Government-published Longitudinal Educational Outcomes (2017).

These latest figures build on a long period of success for Worcester graduates; even during the recession and long economic stagnation, employment rates at the University never fell below 92%. They also show that more than 67% of Worcester graduates remain in the West Midlands, providing a vital workforce for the local economy.

Professor Green added: “Our graduates use their education to not only benefit themselves but also society more broadly. We challenge them to think about how their education, research and lives will benefit humanity. Over 65 per cent of Worcester graduates enter the health and education sectors; this includes nurses, midwives, paramedics, school and early years teachers and those working in family support and social care particularly with children.”

Worcester’s work in inclusion has won a global reputation and led to it being shortlisted for the Times Higher Education University of the Year 2016 and being ranked in the top 10 of universities which best reflect society, according to recent analysis from HEPI the country’s only specialist independent higher education think tank.

Student Satisfaction Excellent at University of Worcester

Monday, 30 July 2018

Graduating students have rated the University of Worcester very highly in the latest National Student Survey (NSS). A remarkable 86.2% of Worcester final year students say they are satisfied overall.

Worcester is now in the top 25% of all universities, at joint 35th out of 151, according to Times Higher Education. Ten courses at Worcester received 100% satisfaction.

The results put Worcester comfortably above the national average, which in contrast saw a small dip in student satisfaction to 83.5%.

The 10 courses given a 100% satisfaction rating from final year students were: Forensic and Applied BiologyAccountingBiochemistryDrama and PerformanceForensic PsychologyGeographyMarketing, Advertising and Public RelationsOccupational TherapyPhysiotherapy and HND Sports Coaching and Physical Education.

Significantly, 24 of Worcester’s courses earned a 90% or above satisfied rating.

More than 320,000 students across the UK responded to the independent, official survey, which has run every year since 2005, and which asks them to rate a number of aspects of their course.

The University of Worcester scored well above the national average and improved across the board in the areas surveyed, which looked at satisfaction with teaching, learning opportunities, academic support, assessment and feedback, learning resources, student voice. Worcester recorded its best ever result for learning resources – being ranked in the top 10%.

Worcester is one of the highest scoring of all Midlands universities, scoring better than the University of Birmingham, which scored 86.0% and the University of Warwick at 84.6%. Amongst many other long-established universities, comfortably surpassed by Worcester, are the University of Southampton at 83.6%, the University of Bristol at 81.6% and Imperial College London at 81.9%.

This was a particularly positive result as it was based on a higher proportion of final-year undergraduate Worcester students (78.4%) responding to the survey than responded nationally (70.29%).

This latest success follows hard on the heels of Worcester being ranked in the top 10 for Overall Satisfaction by postgraduate students, in the national Postgraduate Taught Experience Survey published independently by AdvanceHE.

Year of establishment: 1946

Ranking: University of Worcester is ranked 127th in UK and 3029 in the world.

International student population: 870

International student fee: £12,100-£12,900

Number of intake: January, May and September

Application Processing Timeline: 1-4 weeks


Accounting and Finance

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Accounting & Finance at Worcester special?

Our Accounting and Finance degree aims to build your skills portfolio for a rewarding career in accountancy. You'll actively engage with the leading professional bodies as you position yourself to enter this highly influential sector.

With its strong focus on contemporary issues (such as globalisation, governance and business sustainability), this degree will show you're a highly analytical, numerate and commercially-driven graduate. You'll also be able to demonstrate the knowledge and skills that employers value, and gain 'real world' experience through applied projects and placements.

Overview

Key features

  • Gain exemptions from professional exams (as attached handbook), plus Associate Membership of the IFA and Chartered Management Institute
  • Enhance your employability in a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Compete for the Hereford & Worcester Chamber of Commerce prize for 'Outstanding Performance in Accountancy & Finance'
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"The University is in a lovely, friendly city which offers really interesting modules for the Accounting degree."

Jasmine Hopkins, BA (Hons) Accounting graduate.

 

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Where could it take you?

Careers

Our Accounting and Finance degree will prepare you for a range of careers in accountancy or financial services, including:

  • Accounting
  • Finance
  • Banking
  • Insurance
  • International trade

You'll also get the chance to work with accountants and finance specialists from organisations such as KPMG, Grant Thornton and HM Treasury. These professionals have experience of management, consultancy or running their own business across sectors including banking and manufacturing.

Benefits

Throughout your course, you will receive integrated career coaching to help you develop your CV and interview technique.

There are also a range of extracurricular opportunities offered by the Business School. You can develop your own business through our Business Incubator, or work on live client projects through our Media Lab.

Exemptions and Memberships

This course is designed for maximum exemptions from professional examinations, including:

  • ACCA
  • ICAEW
  • CIMA
  • CIPFA

You will also be able to apply for Associate Membership of the IFA and Chartered Management Institute.

Graduate Employability

Our graduates have secured jobs with companies such as:

  • BDO LLP
  • Ernst & Young LLP
  • KPMG
  • NFU Mutual
  • Lloyds Bank
  • PwC
Biochemistry

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Biochemistry at Worcester special?

The mechanics of life: discover the molecular machinery that lies at the heart of the cell and drives all living organisms. At Worcester, we look at the fascinating world of biochemistry from a variety of angles. The core of our course explores the biochemistry of human health, from the processes that cause cancer to the progression of Alzheimer's disease.

There are also opportunities to extend your learning in to other areas, such as plant biology and microbiology, depending on your specific interests. There is even the chance to get hands on with real immortalised human cells in the lab.

Overview

Key features

  • 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019 and 2018)
  • Opportunities to explore some of the most fascinating fields in science, including neurobiochemistry, cancer immunology and plant developmental genetics
  • Excellent partnerships with many UK and international research institutions, including The Karolinska Institute - home of the Nobel Prize
  • New laboratories and extensive specialist equipment - an inspiring environment for you to develop your ideas
  • Study in a friendly, supportive and inspirational environment

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY100% satisfaction logo

This course received 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)

How will you be taught?

We enable you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and laboratory practicals. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities, such as the discussion of case studies. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, which involve guest speakers. Our laboratory practicals involve individual and group project work which develops subject specific skills that employers value such as molecular biology, enzymology & immunology techniques.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to undertake a subject specific extension module in your final year, as well as work experience, which could be in the form of a summer research assistant within one of our research groups.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 4 to 6 hours of lectures
  • 2 to 4 hours of interactive workshops or seminars
  • Around 8 hours of laboratory practicals

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve, reading journal articles and book chapters, practicing online workshop material and questions, working on group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, technical staff and laboratory demonstrators.

Teaching is informed by our research, and >80% per cent of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include, practical and laboratory reports, essays, presentations such as oral and poster, practical skills tests and workbooks, in class tests, end of semester examinations, as well as a final year independent studies project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • 6 practical workbooks / reports (2 formative and 4 summative)
  • 2 in class tests (including practical skills test)
  • 8 end of semester examinations (1 to 2 hours in duration)

Year 2

  • 4 practical workbooks / reports (summative)
  • 2 essays
  • 1 group oral presentation
  • 1 in class test
  • 8 end of semester examinations (1.5 to 2 hours in duration)

Year 3

  • 2 practical reports (summative)
  • 2 essays
  • 1 group poster presentation
  • 2 in class tests
  • 6 end of semester examinations (2 hours in duration)
  • 1 final year independent study dissertation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Meet the team

Here are a few members of the department who currently teach on this course:

dr-steven-j-coles

Dr Steven J Coles

Steve achieved a first class honours degree in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology at the University of the West of England (UWE, 2005) before undertaking a PhD in Biomedical Sciences (Neurochemistry) which he attained in 2008 (UWE). Following his studies, Steve joined the School of Medicine at Cardiff University as a post-doctoral research scientist (Department of Haematology), where his research focussed on tumour immunology and immunotherapy in a type of blood cancer known as acute myeloid leukaemia (AML).

dr-amy-cherry

Dr Amy Cherry

Dr Amy Cherry joined the University of Worcester following postdoctoral positions at the National Institute of Medical Research and the Karolinska Institute, Stockholm. Her research focuses on understanding how proteins work at the molecular level and on how one can use knowledge of protein structure to tackle disease.

dr-mike-wheeler

Dr Mike Wheeler

Mike is currently investigating the function of a large family of secreted proteins likely to be involved in cell-cell communication in the model plants, Arabidopsis thaliana and Physcomitrella patens.

In addition to his research into plant molecular genetics Mike is also developing means of using molecular biology to solve problems in conservation biology which is a longstanding passion of his. In this area Mike is currently developing eDNA (environmental DNA) techniques to assess the effect of invasive and non-native species on species of conservation concern.

dr-steven-j-coles

Dr Steven J Coles

Steve achieved a first class honours degree in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology at the University of the West of England (UWE, 2005) before undertaking a PhD in Biomedical Sciences (Neurochemistry) which he attained in 2008 (UWE). Following his studies, Steve joined the School of Medicine at Cardiff University as a post-doctoral research scientist (Department of Haematology), where his research focussed on tumour immunology and immunotherapy in a type of blood cancer known as acute myeloid leukaemia (AML).

dr-amy-cherry

Dr Amy Cherry

Dr Amy Cherry joined the University of Worcester following postdoctoral positions at the National Institute of Medical Research and the Karolinska Institute, Stockholm. Her research focuses on understanding how proteins work at the molecular level and on how one can use knowledge of protein structure to tackle disease.

dr-mike-wheeler

Dr Mike Wheeler

Mike is currently investigating the function of a large family of secreted proteins likely to be involved in cell-cell communication in the model plants, Arabidopsis thaliana and Physcomitrella patens.

In addition to his research into plant molecular genetics Mike is also developing means of using molecular biology to solve problems in conservation biology which is a longstanding passion of his. In this area Mike is currently developing eDNA (environmental DNA) techniques to assess the effect of invasive and non-native species on species of conservation concern.

dr-steven-j-coles

Dr Steven J Coles

Steve achieved a first class honours degree in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology at the University of the West of England (UWE, 2005) before undertaking a PhD in Biomedical Sciences (Neurochemistry) which he attained in 2008 (UWE). Following his studies, Steve joined the School of Medicine at Cardiff University as a post-doctoral research scientist (Department of Haematology), where his research focussed on tumour immunology and immunotherapy in a type of blood cancer known as acute myeloid leukaemia (AML).

PreviousNext

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3

Where could it take you?

Globally the employment of biochemists is set to grow by 19% over the next 10 years. This employment growth is greater than the average for all careers. This means that graduates of Biochemistry have excellent opportunities for employment, with many working as scientific researchers within academic, government, industrial or medical institutions both nationally and internationally.

A Degree in Biochemistry at the University of Worcester also provides the foundation for entry to graduate training programmes such as clinical (healthcare) scientist within the NHS, which come with an average starting salary of £25K + per year. The Biochemistry degree is very rich in transferable skills and many graduates may also work in teaching, scientific publishing or in business.

At the University of Worcester, our students come first and we provide workshops to help our graduates enter postgraduate studies at Worcester or other universities.

Biomedical Science

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Biomedical Science at Worcester special?

Our Biomedical Science degree is at the forefront of understanding, diagnosing and treating human disease through laboratory and scientific investigations. Qualified Biomedical Scientists are highly sought after in pathology centres, forensic science laboratories, research institutions and in the biotechnology and pharmaceutical industries.

You will gain the scientific and practical knowledge and skills to diagnose disease, evaluate disease progression and the effectiveness of medical interventions. Investigating potential treatments, researching drug and equipment development, testing emergency blood transfusions and screening for diseases are just a few examples of the application of Biomedical Science.

The Biomedical Science team has an excellent research portfolio, which includes working in NHS diagnostic pathology laboratories. Our teaching staff place a strong emphasis on biomedical diagnostics, therefore research opportunities will be available throughout the course.

Overview

Key features

  • Strong emphasis on practical and laboratory work
  • Professional links give you the chance to put theory into practice through projects linked to the NHS and wider bioscience industry
  • Brand new laboratories and specialist equipment - an inspiring environment for you to gain practical skills and to develop your biomedical research ideas
  • Taught by internationally recognised scientists

Institute of Biomedical Science accredited programme logo

This course is accredited by the Institute of Biomedical Science (IBMS).

Biomedical Science

 

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

We enable you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of lectures, seminars, group work, interactive workshops and laboratory practicals. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practicals are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have the opportunity to engage with professional Biomedical Science practitioners and visit relevant potential employers in a range of different modules in each year.

You will use a range of excellent laboratory facilities, computing suites and software relevant to Biomedical Science throughout the course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 16 contact hours of teaching and in the final year you will have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

The nature of your contact time will vary from module to module but for a 15-credit module it will typically be structured around:

  • 8 hours of interactive workshops
  • 12 hours of large group lectures
  • 10 hours of seminars in groups of around 10 students
  • 18 hours of supervised lab practicals simulations or visits and shadowing opportunities

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time you are expected to undertake around 8-9 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. Our biomedical team is made up of senior academics, professional practitioners with clinical experience, demonstrators and technical laboratory officers. The team includes internationally-recognised scientists whose specialist areas include: cardiovascular disease, wound healing, cancers, diabetes and dementia-related disorders.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and 56 per cent of University lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments.

Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade. Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, laboratory reports, portfolios, presentations and a final year independent study project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • 3 formal examinations of 2 hours and 3 formal examinations of 1.5 hours duration
  • 1 practical test of 2 hours duration
  • 1 essay
  • 6 x practical files/reports
  • 2 x individual or group presentations

Year 2

  • 3 x formal examinations of 2 hours and 4 formal examinations of 1.5 hours duration
  • 1 essay
  • 4 practical reports
  • 4 reports
  • 2 individual or group presentations
  • 1 research proposal

Year 3

  • Major independent study project of 7000 - 9000 words
  • 1 poster
  • 1 formal examinations of 2.5 hours and 4 formal examinations of 1.5 hours duration
  • 2 practical examinations of 1.5 hours
  • 3 essays
  • 2 reports

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Your Biomedical Science degree will prepare you to work in high-tech hospital laboratories in the NHS or private sector. You might work in clinical biochemistry, clinical immunology, cytology, haematology and transfusion science, histology, microbiology or virology diagnostic pathology laboratories. You might also work in biomedical laboratory services and biomedical research in an industrial setting. Alternatively, you might branch out into patent law, medical sales, teaching or build on your Biomedical Science degree to study for other healthcare professional careers such as medicine.

A degree in Biomedical Science is also an ideal platform to launch a research career and progression to a postgraduate qualification.

Business and Marketing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business & Marketing at Worcester special?

Set yourself up for an exciting career in marketing. You'll be supported by regular coaching, and our professional network of academic staff, business leaders and the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM). You'll be well placed to launch your graduate marketing career, whether you aspire to work in a marketing role or for a marketing agency. You can also support website development and marketing campaigns for clients through the Business School's Media Lab.

You'll gain subject expertise in marketing, alongside a grounding in contemporary business issues (such as globalisation, digital communications and the growth of social media). You'll be able to demonstrate your business knowledge through active experience, such as applied consultancy projects, paid placements, internships and study abroad. This active experience will show that you are a creative, customer-oriented and commercially-focused graduate with a broad range of skills that are valued by employers.

Overview

Key features

  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute and accreditation through the Chartered Institute of Marketing - there will be a charge for membership of the professional bodies.
  • Work with marketing specialists and academics who have extensive experience of management, consultancy or running their own business.
  • Contribute to knowledge creation through a research project supported by a member of our Customer Interactions Research Group.
  • Gain experience of working on digital marketing campaigns for commercial clients through the Business School's Media Lab.
  • Develop your own business idea through the Business School's Incubator.
  • Experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Develop the knowledge, skills and capabilities needed to make an immediate impact in your chosen organisation
  • Develop strategic insight in your chosen specialism so that you can deliver long term value for your chosen organisation
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
Business and Finance

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business & Finance at Worcester special?

Set yourself up for a future career in the well-paid finance sector by developing competence in financial and general management. This course gives you access to regular coaching, specialist academic staff, business leaders, and the professional financial services network, including exemptions from ACCA, ICAEW, CIMA, CIPFA and Associate Membership of the IFA.

You’ll gain an insight into general management and access a wide range of optional modules that complement your development as a specialist in financial management. Subject expertise in finance, alongside a grounding in contemporary business issues (such as globalisation, global trade, governance and sustainability), signal that you are a numerate, astute and commercially-focused graduate.

Active experience through applied projects, placements and internships will enable you to demonstrate the business knowledge, commercial acumen and professional skills valued by employers. You can also experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad.

Overview

Key features

  • Gain exemptions (as attached handbook) from ACCA, ICAEW, CIMA and CIPFA and Associate Membership of the IFA and Chartered Management Institute
  • Enhance your employability through internships, consultancy projects, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders
  • Develop your own business idea through the Business School's Incubator
  • Work with qualified finance specialists who have extensive experience of management (including with KPMG, Grant Thornton and HM Treasury), consultancy or running their own business
  • Compete for the Hereford & Worcester Chamber of Commerce prize for 'Outstanding Performance in Accountancy & Finance'

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Develop the knowledge, skills and capabilities needed to make an immediate impact in your chosen organisation
  • Develop strategic insight in your chosen specialism so that you can deliver long term value for your chosen organisation
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
Business and Human Resource Management

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business & Human Resource Management at Worcester special?

Prepare to move into a career in human resource management and development, recruitment & selection, or general management. This course gives you access to regular coaching, as well as our network of specialist academic staff and business leaders. You'll also be able to become an associate member of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and Chartered Management Institute (CMI).

You'll gain subject expertise in human resource (HR) management, alongside a grounding in contemporary business issues (such as change management, talent development, globalisation, workforce diversity, the gig economy and ethical leadership). You'll be able to demonstrate your business knowledge and management skills through active experience, such as applied projects, placements, internships and study abroad. This active experience will show that you are a capable, people-oriented and commercially-focused graduate with a broad range of skills that are valued by employers.

Overview

Key features

  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Institute of Personnel & Development and Chartered Management Institute - there will be a charge for membership of the professional bodies.
  • Engage in the latest thinking through a research project supported by a member of our Careers and Leadership Development Research Group.
  • Work with HR specialists and academics who have extensive experience of management and consultancy.
  • Enhance your employability through internships, consultancy projects, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders.
  • Experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"I feel very lucky to have had so many truly inspirational lecturers. I hope that they know how truly appreciated they are."

Danielle

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

 

Where could it take you?

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Develop the knowledge, skills and capabilities needed to make an immediate impact in your chosen organisation
  • Develop strategic insight in your chosen specialism so that you can deliver long term value for your chosen organisation
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
Business Information Technology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business Information Technology at Worcester special?

This course develops your ability to work at the interface of IT and business. It combines a study of the fundamental aspects of IT applications and processes. You’ll explore the key issues that determine business profitability and sustainability. Alongside core modules, you will be able to follow your interests by choosing from a wide range of optional business and computing modules.

The course has been designed to prepare you for a career in IT and management, such as consultancy, systems analyst or business analyst. You’ll be able to develop your leadership and management skills through live client projects at our Media Lab. You’ll also have the opportunity to start up your own consultancy business through the Business School's Business Incubator or get talent spotted through our annual Computing Showcase.

Overview

Key features

  • You will be taught by experienced computing and business professionals, specialising in the application of new technologies in business (such as social media, cyber security, e-business, data analytics and big data).
  • Option to take a 1-year paid placement, engage in client-based consultancy projects or develop software for clients through the Business School's Media Lab (our student led-software consultancy).
  • Option to start your own consultancy business through the Business School's Business Incubator.
  • 24/7 access to excellent IT facilities, including dedicated PC and Mac labs, featuring industry-standard software.
  • The course has been designed in consultation with employers, aligned with industry standards (ACM, BCS, IEEE).

"I really believe my degree has given me a good stepping stone in my job, and I am using parts that I learnt in the degree most days."

Andrew Hodgson, Graduate, Business Information Technology BSc (Hons)

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of curriculum recommendations and aims developed by three professional bodies (BCS, (British Computing Society) IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) and ACM (Association of Computing Machinery).

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs. 

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and many lectures are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and staff profiles can be view at the WBS Staff Profile Page.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills. Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

We recognise that optimising your future employment and earning potential are a key factor in selecting your degree. All of our courses:

  • offer the option of a paid placement year which significantly increases your chance of getting a job when you graduate, possibly even with your placement company (except Information Technology for Education BSc (Hons)). We also advertise short-term vacancies on our VLE (Virtual Learning Environment)
  • offer the option to spend a year abroad at one of our exchange universities in the USA, Canada, Europe, Australia or New Zealand to help you develop the intercultural skills that are so highly sought after by today's employers
  • target selected Employability Standards in every module. These are designed by Worcester Business School in consultation with employers so you will always be able to see the employability relevance of what you are studying
  • include automatic access to our electronic CV Compiler Tool to create a live and evidence-based CV
  • are accredited by, recognised by or mapped to professional qualifications and/or associations as appropriate
  • provide access to our broad network of business managers and employers (including our own Business School Advisory Board) who work closely with us to design courses, offer scholarships and prizes, host student visits, support student competitions, provide work-related projects and contribute to teaching activities
  • offer employment preparation workshops which include CV preparation, mock interviews/assessment centres and meetings with employers
  • are written and taught by business professionals and practitioners who are fully aware of what today's employers are looking for
  • include work-based learning modules where you can learn via a live work-based project
  • adopt a real-world, applied approach to learning, teaching and assessment so that what you learn is relevant and useful to your future employer(s)
  • offer access to a host of CV-enhancing co-curriculum activities such as our start-up café, international study weeks, case study/business plan competitions, vacation research projects, mentoring activities, etc
  • promote 'earn as you learn' part-time work opportunities which will significantly boost your employability after graduation
  • potential to progress onto the Business School's MBA or DBA.

Read some of our work placement student stories

Business Management

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business Management at Worcester special?

Our flexible Business Management degree explores the latest thinking in innovation, creativity and contemporary issues. You'll work with academics and practitioners who have extensive experience of management, consultancy or running their own business. The course also offers regular careers coaching, and benefits such as our professional network of academic staff, business leaders and the Chartered Management Institute (CMI).

The course will develop your business knowledge, skills and 'real world' experience through applied projects, placements, internships and study abroad. You’ll explore the latest thinking in areas such as accountancy, advertising, entrepreneurship, finance, human resources, law, marketing and public relations. You'll become an adaptable and commercially-driven graduate and well equipped to succeed in your business management career.

Overview

Key features

  • Enhance your employability through internships, consultancy projects, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders.
  • Experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad.
  • Develop your own business idea through the Business School's Business Incubator.
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab.
  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute - there will be a charge for membership of the professional bodies.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one the exchange partner universities.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and many lectures are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and staff profiles can be view at the WBS Staff Profile Page.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes.
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills. Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Our Business Management Degree offers a range of benefits to kick-start your business management career. These include:

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
Business Psychology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business Psychology at Worcester special?

Our courses have been designed to develop you as the psychologist of the future. From innovative and career-focussed assessments to understanding the challenges global societies will face in the future, including; artificial intelligence, automation and big data, your course will equip you with the skills and aptitude to make a difference, whilst providing you with experiential opportunities. Courses are accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS), putting you in a great position when you’re starting your career.

Whatever your course (business, clinicalcounsellingforensicpsychology or sport and exercise psychology), you will be taught by specialist practitioners whose work is underpinned by contemporary research. You will learn from real-world experience, share in cutting-edge research and experience a genuine taste of the work you could be doing after you graduate. You will also notice your lecturers have plenty of time for you – whenever you need help, you can arrange to see them. It’s something our students say they really appreciate.

Your career in psychology starts here, and your lecturers will work with you to help you shape your career path in a variety of ways. They will recommend for example: further study (including our postgraduate courses in occupational, business, forensic and coaching psychology), opportunities for volunteering, and international experiences such as a year or semester abroad.

Overview

Key features

  • A welcoming, professional community of students and lecturers, including the Worcester Psychology Society, with guest speakers, group trips, social nights and a peer mentoring scheme
  • A personalised learning journey; choice of modules, skills development and personal and academic tutoring based as much on your career as your studies
  • Modules and assessments designed with an emphasis on experiential learning which will help you be an active and passionate learner and to understand the challenges global societies will face tomorrow and how psychology plays a role in addressing these
  • ‘Assessments for life’ designed to reflect the key skills that employers of psychology graduates value helping to increase your employability prospects and making you prepared for today, tomorrow and beyond
  • Innovative and cutting-edge modules delivered by practitioners working in their specialist fields through research inspired and practitioner-based teaching
  • Excellent facilities and links with national and local organisations, including the NHS, BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary Hereford and Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORYBritish Psychological Society accredited logo

Accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS).

You will have the opportunity to gain Graduate Basis for Chartership Membership (GBC) of the British Psychological Society – your first step to a career as a psychologist.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive teaching methods, including face to face teaching and online mechanisms for teaching delivery. These include interactive lectures, seminars, tutorials and a virtual learning environment. The range of teaching methods are designed to enable you to engage with active learning strategies, apply learning through questioning and discussion and work both independently and in groups with others.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions per year of a course to ensure our personalised approach helps to meet your learning needs.

You may also have an opportunity to undertake study abroad in one of our many partner Universities.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 10-12 hours of timetabled face to face teaching, plus online directed study activities and optional tutorials. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 8 hours of lectures
  • 2-4 hours of seminars

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 30 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes principal lecturers, senior academics, HCPC registered professional practitioners with clinical experience, and psychology technicians.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is based on research and consultancy, and 93 per cent of teaching staff in the Psychology Department have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles

Assessment

Assessment methods do change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. 

Year 1
Essay X 2
Research Report X 2
1 hour MCQ Exam X 1
Portfolio X 1
Group Video Presentation X 1
Case Study X 1

Year 2
Research proposal x1
Research report x3
Exam x 2
Reflective Log x 1
Group Presentation x1
Critical Appraisal x 1
General Audience Information Document x 1

Year 3
Research Report X 1
Reflective Log X 1
Case Study X 1
Systematic Literature Review x 1
Presentation X 1
Literature Review X 1
Podcast X 1
Psychology Research Project X 1
Portfolio x 1

These are designed across the course for you to build and develop your own personal learning journey with ‘assessments for life’ so that you will have the skills, knowledge and ability for beyond the end of your course.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Before you start your Psychology degree, you'll probably want to know how it can help you into a fulfilling career. Here at Worcester, we've designed the whole Psychology curriculum around your future ambitions - and we support you in developing the skills that will open doors in a range of sectors, including health, business, counselling, forensics, education and sport. Communication, problem solving, critical thinking, team working, and data collection and analysis are just some of the skills that will increase your appeal to employers.

We don’t just help you develop your skills we also provide opportunities for you to practice them, and help you understand your unique and personal ‘skills rucksack’. We work closely with the university's Careers and Employability team, arranging placements, both paid and voluntary, with many local and national organisations - including the NHS, the BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary, Hereford & Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury.

You can also take part in workshops devoted to CV writing, interview skills, recruitment and assessment techniques. And you'll have the chance to talk to guest speakers, and visit potential employers - as well as getting help to apply for work and postgraduate study.

Business, Economics and Finance

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Business, Economics & Finance at Worcester special?

If you have an analytical mind and are fascinated by what is going on in the world, this degree offers a business-oriented gateway into a range of well-paid careers. You'll develop your subject expertise in micro and macroeconomics, set within a contemporary business context, plus insights into financial markets and international banking. This knowledge will signal that you are a commercially-astute, financially-informed and intelligent graduate.

You'll gain active experience through applied projects, placements, internships, study abroad and company visits. You'll also benefit from our network of specialist academic staff, business leaders and the Chartered Management Institute (CMI) and access to regular coaching. These opportunities will enable you to demonstrate the business knowledge and management skills valued by employers. Sectors that welcome economically-literate and financially-astute business professionals include accountancy, finance, banking and local government.

Overview

Key features

  • Focus on your business acumen and the skills and experience needed to thrive in your chosen career.
  • Develop your subject specific interests through optional modules and a research project in your final year.
  • Experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad.
  • Enhance your employability through a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders.
  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute - there will be a charge for membership of the professional bodies.

Book your place at an Open Day

Want to know why so many students love living and studying in Worcester?

Our open days are the perfect way to find out.

BOOK YOUR PLACE

“Studying Economics as part of my degree has helped me develop an understanding of the workings, benefits and drawbacks of different economic systems - past and are present. I have thoroughly enjoyed studying Economics, the thought-provoking lectures and obtaining a solid understanding of fundamental economic ideas that I can only see me benefiting from in the future.”

Ben Hayes, Economics student

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Our Business Management Degree offers a range of benefits to kick-start your business management career. These include:

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
Child and Adolescent Mental Health

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Child and Adolescent Mental Health at Worcester special?

Our Child and Adolescent Mental Health degree is a top-up qualification that will build on your existing knowledge of children and young people's mental health. This programme is aimed at those who are passionate about gaining specialist child and adolescent mental health knowledge. You'll graduate with an honours level degree, which will boost your career prospects in any setting with children, young people and their families where mental health and well-being is a focus.

The course attracts a wide range of children and young peoples professionals from a range of backgrounds. These include education, early years, social work, nursing, CAMH, mental health and health and social care. The modules studied throughout the course will prepare you for a range of roles in support services and communities for children and young people.

Overview

Key features

  • Our BSc (Hons) CAMH Top-up is one of very few third year undergraduate courses specific to CAMH in the UK. There is no requirement for placement/work based learning during the course.
  • Strong links to NHS Child and Adolescent Mental Health Services - guest speakers from these services contribute to the course.
  • Full time with attendance over 1 day per week (normally Wednesday), although there is also a part time option studied over 2 years.
  • Opportunities to pursue further study at postgraduate level after completing the course.
  • You can study this course at Worcester, or at our partner college The Learning Institute (various locations in the South West).

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, individual supervision and assessment workshops/subject tutorials. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures. Individual supervision enables discussion and progression within your Independent Study and assessment workshops/subject tutorials enable further understanding and support with modules and in particular module assessment.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 3 occasions within your year of study.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 7 contact hours of teaching over 1 day per week, this includes 1 hour of contact time per week allocated to your Independent Study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 2 hours of interactive workshops
  • 3 hours of (large group) lectures
  • 1 hour of seminars
  • 1 hour of Independent Study support

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 30 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments, presentations and progressing within your Independent Study.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods, throughout the year include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, presentations, viva voce, reports and an Independent Study.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student during the academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for the course is:

  • 4 essays
  • 1 report
  • 1 viva voce
  • 1-3 presentations (depending on optional modules taken)
  • Major Independent Study of approx 10-12,000 words.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Career opportunities:

Our Child and Adolescent Mental Health degree offers promising graduate prospects in youth mental health services. Many enter universal settings including:

  • Health
  • Education
  • Social care
  • Statutory and non-statutory sectors

This course will enhance your employability, especially those specialising in the Child and Adolescent Mental Health (CAMH) field of practice.

Progression:

You may also pursue further study at postgraduate level. On completion you are eligible to apply for a variety of postgraduate courses including:

Clinical Psychology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Clinical Psychology at Worcester special?

Our courses have been designed to develop you as the psychologist of the future. From innovative and career-focussed assessments to understanding the challenges global societies will face in the future, including; artificial intelligence, automation and big data, your course will equip you with the skills and aptitude to make a difference, whilst providing you with experiential opportunities. Courses are accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS), putting you in a great position when you’re starting your career.

Whatever your course (business, clinical, counsellingforensicpsychology or sport and exercise psychology), you will be taught by specialist practitioners whose work is underpinned by contemporary research. You will learn from real-world experience, share in cutting-edge research and experience a genuine taste of the work you could be doing after you graduate. You will also notice your lecturers have plenty of time for you – whenever you need help, you can arrange to see them. It’s something our students say they really appreciate.

Your career in psychology starts here, and your lecturers will work with you to help you shape your career path in a variety of ways. They will recommend for example: further study (including our postgraduate courses in occupational, business, forensic and coaching psychology), opportunities for volunteering, and international experiences such as a year or semester abroad.

Overview

Key features

  • A welcoming, professional community of students and lecturers, including the Worcester Psychology Society, with guest speakers, group trips, social nights and a peer mentoring scheme
  • A personalised learning journey; choice of modules, skills development and personal and academic tutoring based as much on your career as your studies
  • Modules and assessments designed with an emphasis on experiential learning which will help you be an active and passionate learner and to understand the challenges global societies will face tomorrow and how psychology plays a role in addressing these
  • ‘Assessments for life’ designed to reflect the key skills that employers of psychology graduates value helping to increase your employability prospects and making you prepared for today, tomorrow and beyond
  • Innovative and cutting-edge modules delivered by practitioners working in their specialist fields through research inspired and practitioner-based teaching
  • Excellent facilities and links with national and local organisations, including the NHS, BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary Hereford and Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury
  •  

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORYBritish Psychological Society accredited logo

Accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS).

You will have the opportunity to gain Graduate Basis for Chartership Membership (GBC) of the British Psychological Society – your first step to a career as a psychologist.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive teaching methods, including face to face teaching and online mechanisms for teaching delivery. These include interactive lectures, seminars, tutorials and a virtual learning environment. The range of teaching methods are designed to enable you to engage with active learning strategies, apply learning through questioning and discussion and work both independently and in groups with others.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions per year of a course to ensure our personalised approach helps to meet your learning needs.

You may also have an opportunity to undertake study abroad in one of our many partner Universities.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 10-12 hours of timetabled face to face teaching, plus online directed study activities and optional tutorials. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 8 hours of lectures
  • 2-4 hours of seminars

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 30 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes principal lecturers, senior academics, HCPC registered professional practitioners with clinical experience, and psychology technicians.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is based on research and consultancy, and 93 per cent of teaching staff in the Psychology Department have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles

Assessment

Assessment methods do change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. 

Year 1
Essay X 2
Research Report X 2
1 hour MCQ Exam X 1
Portfolio X 1
Group Video Presentation X 1
Case Study X 1

Year 2
Research proposal x1
Research report x3
Exam x 2
Reflective Log x 1
Group Presentation x1
Critical Appraisal x 1
General Audience Information Document x 1

Year 3
Research Report X 1
Reflective Log X 1
Case Study X 1
Systematic Literature Review x 1
Presentation X 1
Literature Review X 1
Podcast X 1
Psychology Research Project X 1
Portfolio x 1

These are designed across the course for you to build and develop your own personal learning journey with ‘assessments for life’ so that you will have the skills, knowledge and ability for beyond the end of your course.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Before you start your Psychology degree, you'll probably want to know how it can help you into a fulfilling career. Here at Worcester, we've designed the whole Psychology curriculum around your future ambitions - and we support you in developing the skills that will open doors in a range of sectors, including health, business, counselling, forensics, education and sport. Communication, problem solving, critical thinking, team working, and data collection and analysis are just some of the skills that will increase your appeal to employers.

We don’t just help you develop your skills we also provide opportunities for you to practice them, and help you understand your unique and personal ‘skills rucksack’. We work closely with the university's Careers and Employability team, arranging placements, both paid and voluntary, with many local and national organisations - including the NHS, the BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary, Hereford & Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury.

You can also take part in workshops devoted to CV writing, interview skills, recruitment and assessment techniques. And you'll have the chance to talk to guest speakers, and visit potential employers - as well as getting help to apply for work and postgraduate study.

Clinical psychologists are in demand, in areas such as:

  • National Health Service
  • Prison Service
  • Expert Witnesses and the Legal System
  • Educational Settings
  • Social Services
Computer Games Design and Development

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Computer Games Design & Development at Worcester special?

The landscape of the games industry is changing, with an increasing focus on the gamer experience fuelling a boom in the indie games market. In today's industry, small teams of developers can achieve great success with unique gaming experiences that capture the imagination. Our course emphasises a player-centred approach to game design, equipping you with a range of practical skills and insights to become a designer of innovative and exciting gaming experiences.

The course is industry-focused and is designed and delivered by computer games experts and professional game developers, with significant experience in iconic organisations including the BBC. You'll hone the technical skills required to develop gaming experiences into playable and potentially commercial products. You will work in such areas as graphics rendering, game engine development and digital storytelling.

Overview

Key features

  • The course is mapped against the national occupational standards for Games and Interactive Media and the International Game Developer Association's curriculum framework.
  • 24/7 access to excellent IT facilities, including dedicated PC and Mac labs featuring industry-standard software.
  • Taught by computer games experts and professional game developers, with significant experience in iconic organisations including the BBC.
  • Option to take a 1-year paid placement, engage in client-based consultancy projects, develop software for clients through the Business School's Media Lab, or 'earn as you learn'  by setting up as a freelancer.
  • Option to start your own computer games development business through the Business School's Incubator.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"I was able to learn skills which I never thought possible as well as pick up the drive to work harder. Whilst at University I made friendships that I believe will last a lifetime. It was an experience unlike any other and better than I had ever hoped."

Olivia Connolly, Computer Games Design and Development BSc graduate.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All Worcester Business School courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of curriculum recommendations and aims developed by three professional bodies (BCS (British Computing Society), IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) and ACM (Association of Computing Machinery)).

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive lectures, seminars and individual/small group project work with a strong emphasis on real-world scenarios and practical applications. Most of the computing seminars take place in state-of-the-art PC labs using a variety of software specific to each module. The course integrates theory and practice in several areas of web development and e-business in order to obtain an appreciation of a range of applications and their impact on users.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors will take place several times a semester during your time at university.

You have an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement with local or national firms in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor.

You can also choose to study abroad in semester 2 of year 2 at one of our exchange partner universities in Australia, New Zealand, the United States, Canada and Europe.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. In addition to this, you will spend your time sharing your ideas with your fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities, engaging with external employers and on independent self-study.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 23 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and you can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken by you, but we recognise that you like to know in advance how you will be assessed. With this in mind our assessment and feedback strategy has been designed so that:

  • all modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and you as students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the overall module grade by evaluating your learning in a module or a component of a module and comparing it with a standard or benchmark;
  • typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments;
  • across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years, the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. This means a variety of assessments (such as reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) will be encountered by you to suit different learning styles;
  • there may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. applied artefacts are more common in games and programming modules because of the specific nature of the content, while security modules may involve a combination of reports and presentations;
  • supervisors for your games design & development project in your final year will provide individual assistance and help in choosing a specific project (applied or research-based) that fits your career and academic interests;
  • we develop your employability skills by means of, for example, report writing, presentations, and the development of self-awareness and critical reflection in the tasks set.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support your development. We always place you the student at the centre of the learning experience: for example, your written feedback will provide evidence of how you are enhancing your essential academic and employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

We recognise that optimising your future employment and earning potential are a key factor in selecting your degree. All of our courses:

  • offer the option of a paid placement year which significantly increases your chance of getting a job when you graduate, possibly even with your placement company (except Information Technology for Education BSc (Hons)). We also advertise short-term vacancies on our VLE
  • offer the option to spend a year abroad at one of our exchange universities in the USA, Canada, Europe, Australia or New Zealand to help you develop the intercultural skills that are so highly sought after by today's employers
  • target selected Employability Standards in every module. These are designed by Worcester Business School in consultation with employers so you will always be able to see the employability relevance of what you are studying
  • include automatic access to our electronic CV Compiler Tool to create a live and evidence-based CV
  • are accredited by, recognised by or mapped to professional qualifications and/or associations as appropriate
  • provide access to our broad network of business managers and employers (including our own Business School Advisory Board) who work closely with us to design courses, offer scholarships and prizes, host student visits, support student competitions, provide work-related projects and contribute to teaching activities
  • offer employment preparation workshops which include CV preparation, mock interviews/assessment centres and meetings with employers
  • are written and taught by business professionals and practitioners who are fully aware of what today's employers are looking for
  • include work-based learning modules where you can learn via a live work-based project
  • adopt a real-world, applied approach to learning, teaching and assessment so that what you learn is relevant and useful to your future employer(s)
  • offer access to a host of CV-enhancing co-curriculum activities such as our start-up café, international study weeks, case study/business plan competitions, vacation research projects, mentoring activities, etc
  • promote 'earn as you learn' part-time work opportunities which will significantly boost your employability after graduation

Read some of our work placement student stories.

Computing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Computing at Worcester special?

When you study computing, you're in demand and have brilliant career prospects. At Worcester, we teach the skills employers want - and you can develop them in a range of computing areas, tailoring your choice of modules to suit your interests and ambitions. Anything from web design, programming and information systems to games development, drone technology and e-business.

You can also work on live client projects through our Media Lab software consultancy, develop your leadership and management skills, and even start up your own business through our Business School's Incubator. We also offer placement opportunities with companies such as Bosch, IBM and Clearview, and you can present your final year project to industry representatives at our annual Computing Showcase.

Overview

Key features

  • The first drone module in a UK university, where you can learn to be a drone pilot and understand how to use drones in industry.
  • Benefit from our Media Lab, where businesses request project work (such as designing a web page, a mobile app or a game) and students apply to work on it, and get paid while gaining real-world experience under the guidance of a lecturer.
  • Course designed in consultation with employers, aligned with industry standards, and taught by experienced computing professionals.
  • 24/7 access to excellent IT facilities, including dedicated PC and Mac labs featuring industry-standard software.
  • Friendly, sociable team of students and lecturers - for example, the Gaming Society runs regular gaming sessions on campus and arranges field trips to games events.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"I have really enjoyed doing my degree and learnt a huge amount with great support from the lecturers."

Derek Knaggs, BSc Computing graduate.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All Worcester Business School courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of curriculum recommendations and aims developed by three professional bodies: BCS, (British Computing Society) IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) and ACM (Association of Computing Machinery).

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive lectures, seminars and individual/ small group project work with a strong emphasis on real-world scenarios and practical applications. Most of the computing seminars take place in state-of-the-art PC labs using a variety of software specific to each module. The course integrates theory and practice in several areas of computing in order to obtain an appreciation of a range of applications and their impact on users.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors will take place several times a semester during your time at university.

You have an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement with local or national firms in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor.

You can also choose to study abroad in semester 2 of year 2 at one of our exchange partner universities in Australia, New Zealand, the United States, Canada and Europe.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. In addition to this, you will spend your time sharing your ideas with your fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities, engaging with external employers and on independent self-study: see below.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 23 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken by you, but we recognise that you like to know in advance how you will be assessed. With this in mind our assessment and feedback strategy has been designed so that:

  • all modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and you as students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the overall module grade by evaluating your learning in a module or a component of a module and comparing it with a standard or benchmark;
  • typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments;
  • across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. This means a variety of assessments (such as reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) will be encountered by you to suit different learning styles;
  • there may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. applied artefacts are more common in web and programming modules because of the specific nature of the content, while security modules may involve a combination of reports and presentations;
  • supervisors for your computing project in your final year will provide individual assistance and help in choosing a specific project (applied or research-based) that fits your career and academic interests;
  • we develop your employability skills by means of, for example, report writing, presentations, and the development of self-awareness and critical reflection in the tasks set.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support your development. We always place you the student at the centre of the learning experience: for example, your written feedback will provide evidence of how you are enhancing your essential academic and employability skills.

Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

At Worcester we do a huge amount to prepare you for the world of work, including:

  • ensuring the course is designed in consultation with employers, aligned with industry standards, and taught by experienced computing professionals
  • giving you the option of a paid placement year
  • offering you the opportunity to learn via live work-based projects, allowing you to earn as you learn
  • building in employment preparation workshops which include CV preparation, mock interviews/assessment centres, and meetings with employers

All this means our employability stats are pretty impressive.

Our graduates go on to a huge range of careers in the computing and technology sector, with companies such as Bosch, IBM and Clearview.

Contemporary Dance Theatre

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Contemporary Dance Theatre at the University of Worcester special?

Our Contemporary Dance Theatre BA will enable you to creatively explore ways of integrating contemporary dance and theatre. The course will give you exciting opportunities to develop your dance, performance and acting skills. You'll also extend your skill base to include the emerging forms of contemporary circus and aerial performance. The focus is on supporting your development as a creative practitioner, which will prepare you for a career in a range of performance contexts.

The collaborative nature of the course will also facilitate you in forming your own company. You'll have the opportunity to collaborate with musicians, playwrights and actors in the creation of your work. You will be working with professional theatre-makers throughout the course, and will have a number of opportunities to perform publicly. You'll also be able to develop your skills as a future dance theatre workshop leader and network with various dance and theatre organisations.

* Launching in September 2020. Subject to approval

Overview

Key features

  • Integration of dance and theatre in exciting new ways.
  • Opportunities to develop skills in circus, aerial and outdoor performance.
  • Attend technique classes in dance and performance.
  • Benefit from the application of theory into practice.
  • Interdisciplinary projects to create major productions.
  • Learn to lead or tutor other young dance/theatre-makers.

 

How will you be taught?

We enable you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Contemporary Dance Theatre

Develop your skills in our dance studio.

 

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, and practical work. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures. Practical work, in our fully equipped drama and dance studios, introduce you to the possibilities of lighting, sound, video, and space in performance. Circus and aerial work will be housed in a gym equipped with ropes, harnesses and other appropriate equipment.

Trips to see dance and theatre will inform your understanding and experience of performance, and incoming shows and workshops hosted in our Drama Studios will enable you to meet a range of theatre professionals. Level 6 modules will explore how to set yourself up as an independent practitioner, with appropriate business and entrepreneurial skills, as well as develop your skills as a potential performance or workshop leader/tutor in dance/theatre.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least four occasions in the first year as part of the mandatory modules, and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study. Typically contact time will be structured around:

  • 9-12 hours of interactive workshops
  • 3-4 hours of lectures/seminars

Independent self study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22-25 hours of personal self-study per week.

Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, rehearsing with your group, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. 

Duration

  • 3 years full-time
  • 4 years full-time including third year abroad

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The teaching team includes professional dance/theatre-makers, whose work has been produced in theatres across the country. The team also includes specialist in circus and aerial performance.

The department is supported by theatre expertise from our technical staff who specialise in lighting, sound and set design. All the permanent staff within the teaching team have doctorates in the performing arts area, and most are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Specialist staff are also employed on the basis of their professional experience e.g. in circus and aerial performance.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments such as work-in-progress performances or draft written work.

Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.  Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as collaborative practical projects, rehearsal logs, critiques and reviews, essays, portfolios, presentations and a final year independent performance project, or research project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • 3 practical assessments
  • 1 rehearsal log
  • 1 performance review or critique
  • 2 essays
  • 1 staging/technical portfolio
  • 1 presentation

Year 2

  • 1 large group production, plus portfolio of research materials
  • 3 solo or small group practicals
  • 2 essays
  • 1 rehearsal log
  • 1 presentation

Year 3

  • 1 large group production
  • 3 solo or small group practicals
  • 1 project proposal
  • 1 presentation
  • 1 example funding application
  • 1 practical workshop

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.  

Where could it take you?

BA Contemporary Dance Theatre will prepare you for a range of possible careers, including working as a professional performer. Alongside the creative content, the course equips you with the creative and entrepreneurial skills and knowledge to set up as an independent or freelance practitioner. Through working collaboratively across a range of live performance courses, the department facilitates opportunities for students across subjects to work in small groups of writers, performers, directors and technical theatre specialists, facilitating the development of new performance companies. The course also prepares you for leading or tutoring workshops and performances, so future career possibilities include working in performing arts organisations for young people, or the community (such as DanceFest) or to go into teaching. The flexible skills and abilities (such as confidence, creativity, and communication) gained through the very nature of the work greatly enhances your broader employability, and data for 2015/16 graduates indicated that 90% of graduates were in employment 6 months after graduating from courses in the Theatre & Performance Department.

You could also be eligible to move onto the Integrated Masters in Touring Theatre, MA Contemporary Theatre Practice or MRes in Theatre & Performance.

Counselling Psychology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Counselling Psychology at Worcester special?

Our courses have been designed to develop you as the psychologist of the future. From innovative and career-focussed assessments to understanding the challenges global societies will face in the future, including; artificial intelligence, automation and big data, your course will equip you with the skills and aptitude to make a difference, whilst providing you with experiential opportunities. Courses are accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS), putting you in a great position when you’re starting your career.

Whatever your course (businessclinical, counselling, forensicpsychology or sport and exercise psychology), you will be taught by specialist practitioners whose work is underpinned by contemporary research. You will learn from real-world experience, share in cutting-edge research and experience a genuine taste of the work you could be doing after you graduate. You will also notice your lecturers have plenty of time for you – whenever you need help, you can arrange to see them. It’s something our students say they really appreciate.

Your career in psychology starts here, and your lecturers will work with you to help you shape your career path in a variety of ways. They will recommend for example: further study (including our postgraduate courses in occupational, business, forensic and coaching psychology), opportunities for volunteering, and international experiences such as a year or semester abroad.

Overview

Key features

  • A welcoming, professional community of students and lecturers, including the Worcester Psychology Society, with guest speakers, group trips, social nights and a peer mentoring scheme
  • A personalised learning journey; choice of modules, skills development and personal and academic tutoring based as much on your career as your studies
  • Modules and assessments designed with an emphasis on experiential learning which will help you be an active and passionate learner and to understand the challenges global societies will face tomorrow and how psychology plays a role in addressing these
  • ‘Assessments for life’ designed to reflect the key skills that employers of psychology graduates value helping to increase your employability prospects and making you prepared for today, tomorrow and beyond
  • Innovative and cutting-edge modules delivered by practitioners working in their specialist fields through research inspired and practitioner-based teaching
  • Excellent facilities and links with national and local organisations, including the NHS, BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary Hereford and Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury
  •  

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORYBritish Psychological Society accredited logo

Accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS).

You will have the opportunity to gain Graduate Basis for Chartership Membership (GBC) of the British Psychological Society – your first step to a career as a psychologist.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive teaching methods, including face to face teaching and online mechanisms for teaching delivery. These include interactive lectures, seminars, tutorials and a virtual learning environment. The range of teaching methods are designed to enable you to engage with active learning strategies, apply learning through questioning and discussion and work both independently and in groups with others.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions per year of a course to ensure our personalised approach helps to meet your learning needs.

You may also have an opportunity to undertake study abroad in one of our many partner Universities.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 10-12 hours of timetabled face to face teaching, plus online directed study activities and optional tutorials. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 8 hours of lectures
  • 2-4 hours of seminars

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 30 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes principal lecturers, senior academics, HCPC registered professional practitioners with clinical experience, and psychology technicians.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is based on research and consultancy, and 93 per cent of teaching staff in the Psychology Department have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles

Assessment

Assessment methods do change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. 

Year 1
Essay X 2
Research Report X 2
1 hour MCQ Exam X 1
Portfolio X 1
Group Video Presentation X 1
Case Study X 1

Year 2
Research proposal x1
Research report x3
Exam x 2
Reflective Log x 1
Group Presentation x1
Critical Appraisal x 1
General Audience Information Document x 1

Year 3
Research Report X 1
Reflective Log X 1
Case Study X 1
Systematic Literature Review x 1
Presentation X 1
Literature Review X 1
Podcast X 1
Psychology Research Project X 1
Portfolio x 1

These are designed across the course for you to build and develop your own personal learning journey with ‘assessments for life’ so that you will have the skills, knowledge and ability for beyond the end of your course.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Before you start your Psychology degree, you'll probably want to know how it can help you into a fulfilling career. Here at Worcester, we've designed the whole Psychology curriculum around your future ambitions - and we support you in developing the skills that will open doors in a range of sectors, including health, business, counselling, forensics, education and sport. Communication, problem solving, critical thinking, team working, and data collection and analysis are just some of the skills that will increase your appeal to employers.

We don’t just help you develop your skills we also provide opportunities for you to practice them, and help you understand your unique and personal ‘skills rucksack’. We work closely with the university's Careers and Employability team, arranging placements, both paid and voluntary, with many local and national organisations - including the NHS, the BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary, Hereford & Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury.

You can also take part in workshops devoted to CV writing, interview skills, recruitment and assessment techniques. And you'll have the chance to talk to guest speakers, and visit potential employers - as well as getting help to apply for work and postgraduate study.

Our Counselling Psychology degree will allow you to apply for further study, in order to pursue the following careers:

  • Chartered Counsellor
  • Clinical Psychologist
  • Counselling Psychologist

Please note: at this level, students will not practice formal counselling skills. Successful completion of the degree could lead to further training to become a psychologist or counsellor.

You could also explore psychology-related postgraduate courses or careers in:

  • Education
  • Health
  • Academia
  • Sport
  • Forensics
Creative Media

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,224.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Creative Media at Worcester special?

This multi-disciplinary creative digital media course puts a strong focus on getting you ready to enter the job market. Through a combination of live industry briefs, expert guest speakers and the chance to work with specialist industry-experienced teaching staff, you will learn how to design and create across a range of digital platforms. Your studies will incorporate photography, video, motion graphics, visual effects, sound and web content as well as new and emerging technologies such as virtual reality and projection mapping. Our range of modules and briefs will allow you to tailor your course to suit your interests and career aspirations. 

Our Digital Arts Centre has industry standard facilities and software, including Mac suites and study areas, as well as state-of-the-art specialist studio spaces for the creation of video, photography, visual effects and sound.

You will also develop key conceptual skills, gaining an understanding of the cultural, historical and technological influences that continue to shape design and visual communication, alongside your creative and practical work. We encourage innovation in our constantly changing digital industry.

Employers highly value multi-skilled creatives, with the visual communication skills necessary to produce effective campaigns across all digital media for a variety of audiences. Through our industry links, we have achieved a very high graduate employability rate and our graduates continue to drive key creative innovations in a range of sectors. We are proud of our Creative Media community, gaining 100% student satisfaction in the National Student Survey 2019.

Overview

Key features

  • 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)
  • Excellent graduate employability statistics
  • State-of-the-art Digital Arts Centre with industry standard mac suites and software, video and photography studios with green screen, sound studio and study areas
  • Extensive industry links, including live client briefs in collaboration with major national organisations, expert guest lectures and our own commercially experienced specialist staff team
  • With modules in photography, video, visual effects and motion graphics, sound design, innovation, web content, digital design and advertising, you can develop the multi-disciplinary expertise required in this rapidly evolving industry, and tailor the course to your own career aspirations
  • Showcase your talent with our final year Degree Show - a prestigious private view opens the exhibition, with industry professionals offering employment opportunities.

100% satisfaction logo

This course received 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)

MORE ABOUT OUR NSS RESULTSTHE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You will be taught through a combination of lectures, workshops, tutorials, live industry briefs, individual and group projects.
The Creative Media course has a wide range of assessment items and methods, which help prepare for employment. These include digital media practical pieces, reflective analysis, research, learning reports, digital portfolios, group presentations, blogs and learning journals.

Live briefs and industry experts are key to the teaching process, using state-of-the-art software, facilities and studios.

There are a variety of studio workshops to develop specific practical skills, together with conceptual and research discussions. These will take place in module groups, peer teams and tutorials one-to-one with the tutor. The team of technical demonstrators offer a number of additional software, technical and practical sessions.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least four occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of your course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.
Typically, during each of the four sessions, contact time will be structured around:

  • 1 hour of whole group lectures
  • 1 hour of group work or seminar discussion
  • 1 hour of practical workshops

followed by 1 hour of tutorial-based activities

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve designing and developing practical work, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group project briefs, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework and presentations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, The Digital Arts Centre, the Printing Room, the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include:

  • Practical media output
  • Presentations to the module tutor or group
  • Pre-production and production
  • Online blogs
  • Written learning journal
  • Learning reports or reflective critical evaluation

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • No exams
  • 6 x practical media pieces with blog / learning journal
  • 6 x Learning reports / reflective critical analyses
  • 2 Presentations

Year 2

  • No exams
  • 4-6 x practical media pieces with blog / learning journal
  • 8 Learning reports / reflective critical analyses
  • 1 Presentation

Year 3

  • No exams
  • 3 x practical media pieces with blog / learning journal
  • 4 Learning reports / reflective critical analyses
  • 1 Group Practical
  • 1 Group Presentation
  • 1 Degree Show
  • Major Independent Study Practical with 3000 word learning report

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is also given on a regular basis during sessions. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss further with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate, and we welcome requests for one-to-one tutorials.

Peer assessment is carried out in small teams to inform you of peer feedback prior to formal hand in of each module.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Employability is at the heart of our course, with extensive industry links and live professional projects in collaboration with national organisations, expert guest speakers, and a commercially-experienced specialist staff team. Employers highly value multi-skilled creatives, with the visual communication skills necessary to produce effective campaigns across all digital media for a variety of audiences. Through our industry links, we have achieved a very high graduate employability rate.

This course also provides an ideal base from which to go on to postgraduate study.

Graduates have succeeded in a variety of careers that include:

  • Creative Director
  • Photographer
  • Web Content Designer
  • Marketing Manager
  • Advertising Executive
  • Motion Graphics Designer
  • Graphic Designer
  • Video Producer
  • Podcaster
  • Teacher / Lecturer
  • Postgraduate Student
Criminology with Policing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Criminology with Policing at Worcester special?

Our Criminology with Policing degree will prepare you for a range of rewarding roles in the criminal justice system. You'll develop an understanding of criminology from different perspectives, in areas such as crime, criminality, victims and vulnerability.

The course is based on the College of Policing Core Curriculum, which puts you in a great position to pursue a career in the police force. You'll learn from specialist practitioners and real-world experience, so you'll get a genuine taste of the work you could be doing after you graduate.

Overview

Key features

  • Designed for individuals who wish to join the police service, prison or private security organisations
  • You'll have the opportunity to develop specific police skills and/or knowledge and critical understanding of specific areas of criminality or leadership skills
  • Develops your understanding of the legal framework and criminal justice responses to crime
  • Year 3 is open to all professionals who are working, or have already worked in, the sector and wish to gain a degree qualification through the RPL (Recognised Prior Learning) system
  • Can be studied on a full or part-time basis

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

How will you be taught?

We enable students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive lectures, workshops and seminars. As part of your learning you will also be asked to attend areas of the criminal justice system such as the Court, to observe the sector in an operational setting. There is also some online learning activities and group activities where you will be provided with a structure of independent learning through which you will learn to organise and prioritise your research and design and develop your learning strategy. This will be supported through formative feedback and personal academic tutoring. Personal Academic Tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You will also have an opportunity to apply to study at the University of Malta for a semester of the second year. This opportunity will offer you a chance to study with students from many different countries and experience modular learning from a different institution. It will expose you to a very different way of life, culture and practices that will enhance your personal and academic development and your future employability.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 14-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 4 hours lectures
  • 6 hours interactive workshops
  • 4-6 hours group activities
  • 1-2 hours other activities (observations, online activities)

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 14 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve researching, reading, planning and designing projects, completing formative and summative assignments, working with other students in group activities and meeting with your PAT or Supervisor, writers in residence or librarian.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include case studies, essays, exam (these are from other subject areas) presentations, videos, reports, posters and a final year independent study.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • 2 x essays
  • 2 x case studies
  • 1 x presentation (group)
  • 2 x report
  • 1 x poster presentation

Year 2

  • 1 x video and leaflet (group)
  • 1 x research proposal
  • 3 x essays
  • 2 x case studies
  • 2 x presentations

Year 3

  • 1 x Independent Study
  • 1 x essay
  • 1 x case study
  • 2 x presentations
  • 1 x report

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Our Criminology and Policing degree can help you pursue a career in the criminal justice system, including:

  • Police force
  • Prison services
  • Private security sector
  • Criminology
  • Pathway to post-graduate education

Our programme is informed by the College of Policing core learning, providing students with the required skills for candidacy. This includes:

  • Communication
  • Ethics and integrity
  • Evidence-based policing
  • Leadership and management

Please note: From 2020, all new police officers in England and Wales will need to be educated to degree level.

Education Studies

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Education Studies at Worcester special?

Our Education Studies degree will prepare you for a rewarding career in the education sector, working with children, young people or adults. The course will enable you to pursue a diverse range of roles including primary education, prison education, charity education, hospital education and international development. It will also offer opportunities in learning support and supporting learners with special educational needs.

Across the world from the UK to Africa, education is the bedrock upon which our societies are founded. The course will teach you about the development of modern education and how education differs across the world. You'll also learn about education from diverse settings, from Forest Schools to the inner city, and from young minds to lifelong learning.

Our modules will teach you theories from a range of approaches, including political, historical, cultural, psychological and sociological aspects of education. You'll apply these approaches to real-world issues, such as how best to tackle bullying, and our course also considers the climate emergency. Each of the three years consist of a wide range of optional modules so you can tailor your subjects to your interests.

Overview

Key features

  • There is a wide range of module choices to suit a variety of interests.
  • There is an array of diverse career opportunities that are enhanced from doing the Education Studies degree at Worcester. These include prison education, forest schools, work with diverse groups, further education, higher education and youth work.
  • You can go on to complete a Master's degree upon successful completion of the course, which can lead to many opportunities in Higher Education.
  • Excellent teacher training progression opportunities: a 2.2 degree classification or above will enable you to be considered for an interview for one of our PGCE Primary courses, provided you meet the course prerequisites.
  • Strong course links with teacher training providers and a huge variety of employers within the education sector provide excellent placement opportunities.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"The breadth of modules and courses available within Education Studies was amazing. I did drama as well as coaching and mentoring within my discipline, and these gave me a broad range of skills."

Persis Thomas, Education Studies graduate

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive seminars, lectures, presentations and external visits.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on 4 occasions in the first year, three occasions in the second year and twice in the final year of a course.

You have an opportunity to undertake a semester long placement abroad in the second year of the course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 14-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 10 hours of interactive seminars in groups of 15-50 (dependent on modules chosen)
  • 5 hours of full group lectures

In year two and/or three, a half-day per week can be spent in placement for one semester.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online and preparing coursework assignments and presentations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment and extensive electronic learning resources.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade. These assignments might indicatively be essays, critical reflections, presentations and reports. There are no exams on the course.

Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, critical reflections, reports, portfolios, projects, case study, presentations and a final year independent studies project.
The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

3 essays
3 critical reflections
2 presentations
1 report

Year 2

2 essays
2 portfolios
1 research proposal
1 critical reflection
1 presentation
I project

Year 3

1 independent study
3 essays
2 case studies
2 presentations
1 report
1 reflective summary

Feedback

You will receive feedback on formative assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal coursework assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and professional practitioners with relevant experience.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and 100 per cent of course lecturers have (or are working towards) a higher education teaching qualification (excluding Sessional lecturers) or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. In addition, several lecturers either hold or are working towards doctorates in education and are active educational researchers.

You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Our Education Studies degree provides an excellent route into many careers or further study.

You may wish to progress on to a PGCE course (to become a qualified primary or secondary teacher).

We also run an MA in Education degree, and guidance is given to support you to do this successfully.

Careers that graduates move into include:

  • Child welfare
  • Learning mentor
  • Training professional in the private sector
  • Military service
  • Prison education
  • Lecturing in further education
  • Working in higher education
  • Youth work
  • International development work
  • Working in a charity
Film Studies

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Film Studies at Worcester special?

Our Film Studies programme is about cine-literacy: studying of popular movies, art cinema and experimental film; contemporary and historical, mainstream and alternative, international and domestic cinemas as a kind of literature. Our Film Studies programme, in this sense, is an extension to our English Literature programme, studying films as text, and exploring the cultural, political, personal contexts of the text’s creation. 

We also explore the opportunities Film Studies opens by examining film marketing, distribution, exhibition, curating, festivals, film journalism and audience research.  

Overview

Key features

  • Balance between contemporary and older films; British, Hollywood, and International cinemas.
  • Research-led teaching by internationally recognized experts in their fields.
  • Employability embedded across the course, offering students opportunities in a variety of career paths.
  • Joint Honours options with English Literature, Media & Culture, Film Production, and Screenwriting
  • Diverse team of academics with a variety of expertise.

How will you be taught?

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. If there are insufficient numbers of students interested in an optional module, this might not be offered, but we will advise you as soon as possible and help you choose an alternative. 

Teaching

The two main forms of teaching on the Film Studies programme are the lecture and the seminar class. Lectures typically run 45-50 minutes each, and expose the student to a consistent argument constructed by the lecturer either introducing the student to key theoretical debates or applications of theory to a body of cinema texts. Seminars, which tend to be 2-hours in length, enable students to discuss the theoretical principles and applications made in the lecture. Seminars may feature small -group discussion, further application of theory to different films, or other research-led projects as befits the topic and the cohort of students. While lectures tend to be rather formal in structure and organisation, seminars can be more loosely structured and tailored to the specific students on a given module in any given year.  

In addition, meetings with Personal Academic Tutors are scheduled on at least four occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course. 

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip them for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services, and also the Personal Academic Tutoring system enables students to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help them to flourish and be successful.  

Contact time

In a typical week, students will have around 12 contact hours of teaching.  The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year there is normally slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.   

Typically, class contact time will be structured around: 

  • 1-hour lectures, per module per week 
  • 2-hour seminars, per module per week 

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week.  Typically, this will involve reading articles or chapters, and of course, watching the assigned films.  

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.   

Assessment

Assessment in Film Studies is entirely course-work based. Mostly, these take the form of essays, but there are also opportunities for group-based assessments, like presentations, or reports, learning logs, self-reflective pieces, and portfolios of work.

While grades are determined by summative assessments, Film Studies offers more formative assessments, enabling students to receive feedback on their work without it counting towards their grade.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Teaching Staff

All teaching staff on the Film Studies course have PhDs in their field (or are working on their PhDs), and are research active to facilitate research-led teaching. Therefore, students will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The teaching team are research-active specialists in film theory, have doctoral qualifications, and HEA accreditation. Please see details of the current staff team in the School of Humanities at our website.   

Programme Specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

The Film Studies programme is designed around exposing students to a wide variety of employment options after a Film degree beyond being a filmmaker or reviewer specifically.

Through the programme’s core modules, employability opportunities are specifically identified and attendant skills developed. At Level 5, for example, the course team expand the student’s understanding of film-based employment options by directly addressing film cultures like festivals, programming special seasons, curetting, audience research, marketing, and distribution & exhibition contexts. Level 5 also has an optional Work Experience module which students may opt in for.

Level 6 enables students to explore more independently their own interests in further developing their employability options in two ways: potentially through their independent study projects and through the Film Reviewing module.  

The course team work closely with employers – such as Flicks in the Sticks, Rural Media Company, Worcester Arts Workshop, and Worcester Live, – to ensure that our programme is developing the right skills base that employers are looking for.

Forensic and Applied Biology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Forensic and Applied Biology at Worcester special?

At Worcester you can study forensic science alongside the biological aspects that underpin it, deepening your understanding and enhancing your employment prospects. With the forensic content you can learn 'what' to do, but with the addition of biology you will also learn 'how' and 'why', thus gaining a more rounded body of knowledge highly valued by employers.

All of the modules are interactive and give you all important experience of applying theory in real world practical sessions. Students are taught and supported in comparatively small groups by experts in their field.

Overview

Key features

  • According to the complete university guide, Our Forensic and Applied Biology BSc course is ranked 15th out of all Forensic Science courses across the country
  • Accredited by the Chartered Society of Forensic Sciences. The first undergraduate degree in the country to be accredited with them for the Forensic Archaeology Component Standard
  • Excellent facilities including research labs, crime scene simulation house, geophysical equipment for detecting concealed burials and crime scene investigation kits
  • Strong industry links with West Mercia and Warwickshire police, and the Severn Area Rescue Association
  • Highly experienced staff with over 100 years combined experience in the field, giving you access to realistic scenes and real cases
  • Graduates successfully compete for both biological and forensic careers

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

We enable you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of lectures, practical work, field work, video presentations, group tutorials, discussions, directed reading, and formative assessments. The first year also includes study skills sessions. The course is very practical and offers you the opportunity to undertake an independent project in your third year. The emphasis on the development of 'hands on' practical skills will provide you with useful skills for your future career.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to take a work experience module in your second or third year, to engage with an Erasmus scheme and spend a semester abroad, or to become involved in staff research through the Vacation Research Assistantship Scheme.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 4 hours of lectures
  • 11 hours of supervised laboratory practicals
  • 1 hour of group workshops
  • 1 hour of Study Skills (first year only)

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 27 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve going over your lecture notes and reading around the topic in order to reinforce the content, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. You will mainly be taught by senior academics, but visiting speakers with specialised expertise may deliver some sessions. Technicians support practical sessions.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and 93 per cent of course lecturers in the Biological Sciences have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Twenty per cent also have Teaching Fellowships from the University of Worcester. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include practical reports, presentations, posters, on-line activities, essays and examinations (which may be practical, written, data analysis, seen exams or open book exams).

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
1 Essay
1 Forensic statement
2 Practical tests
2 Practical files
5 exams

Year 2
2 forensic case notes and statements
2 in class tests
3 practical reports
3 exams of 1.5 or 2 hours duration
1 portfolio of evidence
1 data exercise
1 research proposal
1 CV and practice job interview

Year 3
1 Independent study report
1 poster presentation
3 examinations of 1.5 or 2 hours duration
1 court room assessment
1 in class test
3 forensic case notes / witness statement
1 portfolio
1 essay
1 online activity

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

This course provides you with the core biology skills and knowledge to make you suitable candidates for all the biological careers available to those students on the mainstream biology programmes as well as forensic areas. These include:

  • Research
  • Biological testing
  • Teacher training
  • Medical sales
  • Diagnostics testing
  • Crime scene investigation
  • Forensic science
  • Civil services
  • The police force
  • Further study - Masters / PhD.

There is a good employability rate for this course upon successful completion with our graduates going on to enjoy a variety of opportunities from Forensic toxicology, Forensic DNA analysis, Science based laboratory positions and further studies which include Phd/MSc/MRes in a number areas such as Genetics / Molecular studies, Forensic Anthropology and teaching qualifications.

Employability

This course prepares you for a range of careers in different fields and services, including the police force, fire service, local government and planning, laboratory and environmental research, Civil Service or teaching and all biology careers available to those on a traditional biology degree course (due to the unique combination of forensic and core biology course content).

You will have opportunities to develop a wide range of intellectual, practical and social skills. These include primary research using both quantitative and qualitative techniques, data collection and analysis, oral and verbal communication, critical evaluation and laboratory techniques.

In addition to transferable academic skills, you will develop skills and the confidence to operate in both the forensic area and a wide variety of other work environments.

For example, Biologists who can look at evidence and make measured and reasoned arguments are not only required in scientific fields but also in the media, retailing and finance to ensure there is a balanced view relating to new technology and the estimation of risk.

There is also a need for people to be able to explain these scientific arguments in 'lay' terms, not only in teaching but also in a wide range of other vocations.

Forensic Psychology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Forensic Psychology at Worcester special?

Our courses have been designed to develop you as the psychologist of the future. From innovative and career-focussed assessments to understanding the challenges global societies will face in the future, including; artificial intelligence, automation and big data, your course will equip you with the skills and aptitude to make a difference, whilst providing you with experiential opportunities. Courses are accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS), putting you in a great position when you’re starting your career.

Whatever your course (businessclinicalcounselling, forensic, psychology or sport and exercise psychology), you will be taught by specialist practitioners whose work is underpinned by contemporary research. You will learn from real-world experience, share in cutting-edge research and experience a genuine taste of the work you could be doing after you graduate. You will also notice your lecturers have plenty of time for you – whenever you need help, you can arrange to see them. It’s something our students say they really appreciate.

Your career in psychology starts here, and your lecturers will work with you to help you shape your career path in a variety of ways. They will recommend for example: further study (including our postgraduate courses in occupational, business, forensic and coaching psychology), opportunities for volunteering, and international experiences such as a year or semester abroad.

Overview

Key features

  • A welcoming, professional community of students and lecturers, including the Worcester Psychology Society, with guest speakers, group trips, social nights and a peer mentoring scheme
  • A personalised learning journey; choice of modules, skills development and personal and academic tutoring based as much on your career as your studies
  • Modules and assessments designed with an emphasis on experiential learning which will help you be an active and passionate learner and to understand the challenges global societies will face tomorrow and how psychology plays a role in addressing these
  • ‘Assessments for life’ designed to reflect the key skills that employers of psychology graduates value helping to increase your employability prospects and making you prepared for today, tomorrow and beyond
  • Innovative and cutting-edge modules delivered by practitioners working in their specialist fields through research inspired and practitioner-based teaching
  • Excellent facilities and links with national and local organisations, including the NHS, BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary Hereford and Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORYBritish Psychological Society accredited logo

Accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS).

You will have the opportunity to gain Graduate Basis for Chartership Membership (GBC) of the British Psychological Society – your first step to a career as a psychologist.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive teaching methods, including face to face teaching and online mechanisms for teaching delivery. These include interactive lectures, seminars, tutorials and a virtual learning environment. The range of teaching methods are designed to enable you to engage with active learning strategies, apply learning through questioning and discussion and work both independently and in groups with others.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions per year of a course to ensure our personalised approach helps to meet your learning needs.

You may also have an opportunity to undertake study abroad in one of our many partner Universities.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 10-12 hours of timetabled face to face teaching, plus online directed study activities and optional tutorials. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 8 hours of lectures
  • 2-4 hours of seminars

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 30 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes principal lecturers, senior academics, HCPC registered professional practitioners with clinical experience, and psychology technicians.

Postgraduate research students who have undertaken teacher training may also contribute to the teaching of seminars under the supervision of the module leader. Teaching is based on research and consultancy, and 93 per cent of teaching staff in the Psychology Department have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles

Assessment

Assessment methods do change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. 

Year 1
Essay X 2
Research Report X 2
1 hour MCQ Exam X 1
Portfolio X 1
Group Video Presentation X 1
Case Study X 1

Year 2
Research proposal x1
Research report x3
Exam x 2
Reflective Log x 1
Group Presentation x1
Critical Appraisal x 1
General Audience Information Document x 1

Year 3
Research Report X 1
Reflective Log X 1
Case Study X 1
Systematic Literature Review x 1
Presentation X 1
Literature Review X 1
Podcast X 1
Psychology Research Project X 1
Portfolio x 1

These are designed across the course for you to build and develop your own personal learning journey with ‘assessments for life’ so that you will have the skills, knowledge and ability for beyond the end of your course.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Before you start your Psychology degree, you'll probably want to know how it can help you into a fulfilling career. Here at Worcester, we've designed the whole Psychology curriculum around your future ambitions - and we support you in developing the skills that will open doors in a range of sectors, including health, business, counselling, forensics, education and sport. Communication, problem solving, critical thinking, team working, and data collection and analysis are just some of the skills that will increase your appeal to employers.

We don’t just help you develop your skills we also provide opportunities for you to practice them, and help you understand your unique and personal ‘skills rucksack’. We work closely with the university's Careers and Employability team, arranging placements, both paid and voluntary, with many local and national organisations - including the NHS, the BPS, West Mercia Police Constabulary, Hereford & Worcester Fire and Rescue Service, Worcestershire County Council and HMP Aylesbury.

You can also take part in workshops devoted to CV writing, interview skills, recruitment and assessment techniques. And you'll have the chance to talk to guest speakers, and visit potential employers - as well as getting help to apply for work and postgraduate study.

Graphic Design

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Graphic Design at Worcester special?

Our broad-ranging Graphic Design degree puts theory into practice, with live briefs for genuine clients from design and advertising consultancies, publishing organisations, local industries, sustainable design clients and national brands. The programme will give you exposure to commercial and professional situations as your academic knowledge and practical abilities grow.

Graphic designers are the gatekeepers of visual communication. Thanks to the smartphone, the entire internet now fits inside our pocket. In the digital age, there is a greater need than ever for eye-catching graphics and inspirational messages that stands out from the crowd.

From a single printed advert to the complex visual language of a major company's brand, graphic designers create compelling stories in visual language. Our course will provide you with the skills needed to create these compelling visual stories, as you pursue a career as a graphic designer.

There are regular visits to museums and exhibitions in London, Bristol and live brief related day visits and workshops too. There is also an annual opportunity to take part in a visit to a destination in mainland Europe.

Overview

Key features

  • 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)
  • Extensive industry links, including live professional briefs run in collaboration with major organisations, expert guest lecturers and our own commercially experienced staff team
  • Showcase your talent with our final year Degree Show. A prestigious private view opens the exhibition, your chance to share your work with top industry professionals
  • 94% of students within work or further study six months after graduation
  • Diverse future career possibilities, including graphic design, children's publishing, web design, sustainable packaging and print design, arts and media administration, or as self-employed designers
  • Develop your Graphic Design skills further while working on ‘live’ briefs for real industrial clients from both regional businesses, design & advertising consultancies and national brands

100% satisfaction logo

This course received 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)

MORE ABOUT OUR NSS RESULTSTHE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"The entire course staff have been nothing but supportive over the last three years, while encouraging and developing creative skills with all students."

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

A big focus within the Graphic Design course is to make sure our students are experienced not only in an academic sense, but also practically through 'live' briefs with real clients and wants. Students will most likely encounter more 'live' briefs from year 2 onwards and will definitely be expected to have had some of these experiences by the close of year 3.'Live' briefs (where students normally only take design outputs to 'working prototype' level only) run in parallel with your academic learning on our year 2 and year 3 modules and provide excellent experiences and transferable skills as well as portfolio pieces that you as a graduate can use in interview situations and discussions with future employers.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of: taught sessions, workshops, individual tasks and occasional small and large group tasks. In addition, you may also witness visiting speakers and client meetings in years 2 and 3 as we scale up your involvement in real/live projects.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to develop your existing skills in design, visualising, mac skills (around the latest versions of the Adobe Suite) as well as your skills in liaising with and presenting to clients. As well as your academic learning we'll look to put on supporting/linked study visits where appropriate, visiting lectures from professionals across a range of related mediums and client meets and presentations.

You'll also have the opportunity to attend specialist trips to events, museums and sites linked to your studies.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 1.5 hours of lectures, small and large group work, presentations, linked videos
  • Break 30 mins
  • 1 hour of lectures, small and large group work, presentations, linked videos 

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around up to 10 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve: completion of tasks set in the classroom, research linked to a brief set and/or ongoing development of your work linked to a module's major assessed brief.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. We also offer up Skype tutorials now in some cases.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include: Assessment of written, design and personal development blog outputs by tutor. Assessment of presentation talks about work ongoing.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

  • Year 1 Assessment of either written report (1500 words) and design outputs and/or presentation at the end of both semester 1 and 2. 
  • Year 2 Assessment of either written report (1500 words) and design outputs and/or presentation at the end of both semester 1 and 2. 
  • Year 3 Assessment of either written report (1500 words) and design outputs and/or presentation at the end of both semester 1 and 2.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate. We commonly provide feedback either as a 1-1 informal tutorial scenario or via e-mail or (on request) Skype or equivalent video conferencing.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes specialists with industrial experience in the fields of: Web Design and Coding, Typography, Visualising, Layout and Design for print and screen/linked media, Mac skills (with the Adobe Suite), Information Design Skills and Children’s Book Design and Publishing Skills to name but some.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy and 90 per cent of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Graduates of our Graphic Design degree have gone on to work in sectors such as:

  • publishing
  • graphic design
  • web design
  • media and arts administration
  • self-employment

This course also provides an excellent basis for postgraduate study, to further progress your career as a graphic designer or other digital professional.

Its interdisciplinary nature means that students develop skills that are attractive to employers. In a Destinations Survey carried out by the University of Worcester Careers Service, 94% of Design students had found work or had gone on to further study within six months of graduating.

Martin Price, Graphic Design BA graduate.

 

Graphic Design, Advertising and Marketing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,330.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Graphic Design, Advertising & Marketing at the University of Worcester special?

This degree has been specifically designed in collaboration with leading industry professionals, for anyone wanting to experience an agency style learning environment and work in multi-disciplinary creative teams, tackling real-world brand projects.

To equip you with the right balance of conceptual, creative and practical skills the course focuses on original thinking and innovation, so you learn about graphic design theory, big advertising ideas, customer insights, narrative & storytelling and how to confidently present your ideas to clients.

As your academic knowledge and practical abilities grow, we teach you about visual identity & brand language, design for print, design for web, art direction, digital & social media marketing and how to cultivate your own entrepreneurial approach, preparing you to work alongside the very best in the world of visual communication.

* Launching in September 2020. Subject to approval

Overview

Key features

  • Engaging methods of academic and agency style tutoring
  • Access to new state-of-the-art facilities
  • Opportunities for agency internships and collaborations
  • A vibrant programme of award-winning visiting lecturers
  • A wide range of creative opportunities after graduation

How will you be taught?

We enable you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

Graphic Design, Advertising & Marketing draws upon three distinctive yet complementary disciplines and the teaching reflects this. Across the course you will experience a variety of practical and theoretical methods including; studio practice, interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, live briefs & internships.

Studio Practice and Interactive Workshops will equip you with all the practical skills you need from a creative perspective. Lectures and Seminars will equip you with all the theoretical skills needed from an academic perspective. Live Briefs allow for an agency style group project, bringing both creative and theoretical application together in multi-disciplinary teams.

You will be allocated a Personal Academic Tutor who will be accessible to you throughout your time here via a number of scheduled group and individual sessions, scheduled on at least four occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of the course, plus additional private meetings for help and advice should you need it.

The emphasis is on enabling you to develop all the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as the academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services as well as the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you towards your goals.

Contact time

In a typical week, you will have around 15 contact hours of teaching plus tutorials depending upon the optional modules selected. In the final year, you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study and work placement opportunities. The typical contact time will be structured around:

  • 12 hours of interactive studio-based practice sessions and/or workshops
  • 3 hours of lectures and seminars

Class sizes will be around 20-25. Where larger lectures take place, learning is supported with group-based approaches or online activities.

Independent self-study

In addition to the above contact time, students are expected to engage with around 22-25 hours of personal study per week. Typically, this will involve individual and/or group work on projects and tasks, preparing for assignments, trips to see work and going to the library. Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent facilities, including the Hive library, the virtual learning environment, extensive access to vast electronic learning resources and purpose built contemporary design and media studios.

Duration

  • 3 years full-time
  • 4-6 years part-time

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team selected from Graphic Design, Advertising & Marketing whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes respected senior academics and professional practitioners with substantial, current industry experience. This is supplemented with access to leading industry experts.

Assessment

Assessment takes the form of formative (informal) and summative (formal) assessment.

Formative assessments carry no weighting but are really important, designed to help you achieve your best in the final summative assessments. Formative assessment can take different forms such as student support teams, informal peer assessment or rehearsed presentations. It is also embedded in your ongoing engagement with tutors’ and is part of the individual tutorial system.

Each module has summative assessment which normally requires a combination of practical work, critical reflection and written assessment that can vary and might require different forms such as essay, contextual analysis, blog, creative writing or learning journal. There is also one formal written examination in the third year.

The following gives an indication of the types of assessment you might expect across any year. This is only an indication and will vary depending upon your choice of modules.

Year 1

  • 4 x practical projects
  • 1 x critical reflection writing tasks
  • 1 x individual presentation
  • 1 x group presentation
  • 1 x essay

Year 2

  • 4 x practical projects
  • 1 x critical reflection writing tasks
  • 1 x individual presentation
  • 1 x group presentation
  • 1 x essay

Year 3

  • 3 x practical projects (including 1 independent major project)
  • 1 x critical reflection writing tasks
  • 1 x individual presentation
  • 1 x group presentation
  • 1 x essay (6,000 words)

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Where could it take you?

The balance of the course is such that you will be able to develop enough high-level skills and understanding of Graphic Design, Advertising & Marketing to pursue specific career opportunities, for example as a Creative Director, Marketing Director or Art Director. Equally you would be equipped to apply for careers generally not considered by traditional courses, like a Copy Writer, Client Director, Motion Graphics Designer, Creative Strategist, Brand Manager, Visual Planner, Digital media Designer, Communication Manager or Brand Manager.

The entrepreneurial aspect of the degree aims at giving you the confidence to work as a freelance contractor, or even to set up and run your own creative company should you wish.

Contact with industry through internships and visits will allow you to develop valuable industry connections and contacts in addition to real life experience.

The transferable skills of graduates in this domain are those much sought after in a range of other environments such as business and commerce; they enhance students’ profiles and employability and they are explicitly found in all work undertaken. The development of an appropriate work ethic, including taking on roles and responsibilities, negotiation and decision making, leadership, interpersonal engagement and serving the whole are essential in any kind of production work, and this is embedded in the learning and teaching and assessment strategies employed by the department.

Illustration

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Illustration at Worcester special?

Illustration is a visual language, and has a relationship with the text that it addresses. Each half of the partnership has different moves, but they have to work together.

At Worcester, you can be part of the global picture. With our emphasis on international collaboration and real-world experience, you will have the opportunity to develop your ideas and your portfolio, and will also have every chance to show them off in public exhibitions. Industry links with major illustrators and publishers from around the world, such as Axel Scheffler, means you can be a part of the international illustration community from day one.

Read the Worcester Illustration Course Blog.

Overview

Key features

  • Work to real-world briefs provided by professional publishers
  • Home of the International Centre for the Picture Book in Society
  • Award-winning lecture staff have extensive experience as professional illustrators
  • Opportunities to exhibit your work nationally and internationally. Field trips within the UK and overseas
  • Celebrate your achievements and showcase your talent with our final year Degree Show, housed within the state-of-the-art facilities in The Art House and share your work with top industry professionals

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of practical workshops, lectures, seminars and tutorials. Theory and context is embedded within practical sessions supporting students practice led research. A strong emphasis is placed upon students developing their own unique visual language - learning programs designed to support communication, technical and research skills provide the basis for this.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have the opportunity to study abroad for a semester in the second year of the course. Further to developing your professional practice, many opportunities to work on live briefs and national/international competitions are provided. This is also supported by our outstanding visiting speaker program which takes the form of lectures, seminars and portfolio reviews.

You use industry-standard design software and have access to printmaking, 3d model making and lasercut facilities throughout the course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 15-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 4 hours of formal lectures
  • 2 hours of demonstrations
  • 10 hours of supervised studio practice
  • typical class sizes range between 15 - 22 students

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 12 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve accessing reading lists and online resources, researching in the library and online, group task work, preparing presentations and developing personal sketchbook practice.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You are taught by lecturers who, themselves, are also professional, published illustrators working across editorial, publishing, advertising and authorial practices. Your learning is also supported by our technical team who provide demonstrations, tutorials and workshops.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and 60 per cent of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as learning reports, portfolio submissions, interviews, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • Portfolio of practical outcomes
  • Sketchbook submissions
  • Critical learning reports

Year 2

  • Portfolio of practical outcomes in response to set briefs
  • Sketchbook submissions
  • Critical learning reports
  • Individual or group presentations

Year 3

  • Major independent study project comprising of a portfolio submission containing practical outcomes, supported by a critical report
  • Portfolio of self-directed projects
  • Critical learning reports

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate. We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Illustrators are in increasing demand as the media industries expand. Options for the professional illustrator include newspapers and magazines, books, advertising, exhibiting independent work, television and the internet. All these fields are potential showcases for graduates' work.

Our interdisciplinary approach gives flexibility and a wider view of the world that is attractive to employers. Graduates will find career opportunities not only in illustration but also graphic design, teaching, story writing, studio management, concept illustration for animation and games and advertising.

The course also provides an ideal basis for postgraduate study.

Integrative Counselling

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Integrative Counselling at Exeter or Hereford & Ludlow special?

Graduates of the Foundation Degree (FdA) in Integrative Counselling can 'top up' their award and obtain a University Honours Degree in one year of extra study. We also welcome applications from other qualified counsellors (see below for eligibility criteria) - this course offers an excellent opportunity'to refresh and update their professional skills.

Recognised as a full-time programme and eligible for Student Finance applications, teaching takes place at Iron Mill College in Exeter or at Hereford & Ludlow College. During the course, participants are also required to undertake approximately 30-50 hours of work based learning, 20 hours of personal therapy and also continue their counselling practice (achieving a minimum of 50 counselling hours during the programme) with supervision to BACP requirements. Students will also need to allow time for independent guided study and assessment preparation.

This course is delivered at either Iron Mill College in Exeter (see their course page) or Hereford & Ludlow College (see their course page).

Overview

Key features

  • An innovative, fascinating and up-to-date programme which will allow students to develop an impressive professional portfolio of skills to take into employment and enhance their career.
  • Participants can develop their counselling knowledge and skills in a specialist area, design a research proposal on a chosen area and undertake a negotiated work based learning project of their choice.
  • Encourages a wider view of counselling in the 21st century, including the exciting developments in the present and future of the profession.
  • Includes experiential and theoretical learning in a unique classroom setting, with outstanding individual support from our highly experienced teaching team.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of lectures, seminars, experiential exercises, group work, action methods, discussion groups, modelling, audio-visual input, clinical skills, creative work and personal research.

In addition, individual meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled outside of class time on at least 3 occasions per academic year, with additional group tutorials occurring in class time if required.

The programme provides the opportunity to develop a specialism in a professional area of choice, and we also place emphasis on your own personal development throughout the programme. Your supervised placement practice will allow you to apply your learning and gain valuable experience and confidence.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 6.25 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the module. You will also be expected to carry out independent study to consolidate and enhance your learning on this programme, and to address the assessments.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 2 x hours of interactive lectures, workshops and creative experiential exercises
  • 1 x hour seminar and group discussion/ activities
  • 2 x hours supervision, clinical work and applied learning
  • 1 x hour group work

Independent self-study

This full-time programme involves a high degree of self-directed learning at approximately 22 hours per week.

Typically, this will involve:

  • reading of text books and journals
  • professional portfolio activities, organisation and writing
  • work based learning activities and project
  • placement/ workplace counselling practice - a minimum of 50 hours
  • supervision of counselling practice - a minimum of 1.5 hours per month
  • personal therapy and/or similar therapeutic reflective development activity - a minimum of 20 hours
  • preparation for assignments

Time spent on the above activities will vary from student to student but all of the above must be included in the learning process.

There are additional costs related to most counselling programmes, such as professional body membership fees, supervision if not provided by the placement, and personal therapy costs. For a breakdown of expected additional costs on this programme, please see the 'Fees' tab on the BA (Hons) in Integrative Counselling page of the Iron Mill College website.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes experienced practitioners who are MBACP, UKCP, or MBACP (Accred.), and who are also in ongoing supervised practice as therapists. The academic team aim to create a colourful and varied learning experience, combining up to date theory, experiential activities, practical work, and reflective opportunities. Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and all lecturers associated with the course have teaching qualifications and / or substantial teaching experience at HE level, with three members of the team being Fellows of the Higher Education Academy (HEA). You can learn more about our staff by visiting our Staff Profiles on the Iron Mill College website here.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to enhance and assess understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one formal or 'summative' assessment that is graded and counts towards the overall module grade.

  • Summative assessments, such as essays, case studies, recorded practice assessments, projects and research, are formally marked. You will be awarded a grade or percentage which indicates whether you have successfully passed the module.
  • Formative assessments such journal writing, feedback on skills practices, and participation in experiential work, as well as feedback from your placement and supervisor, are not formally marked, but are an important element of the course.

Summative assessments:
1 x case presentation and discussion
1 x essay
1 x research proposal 
1 x work-based learning project: portfolio and presentation

In addition students will need to complete and provide evidence of:

50 counselling hours in a placement or workplace
20 hours of personal therapy/ similar therapeutic activity
30 hours (approximately) Work Based Learning

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with module tutors as appropriate. We provide opportunities for you to receive feedback in the following forms:

  • Verbal documented feedback provided in your 1:1 tutorial sessions
  • Written comments from your tutor, usually attached to your assignments
  • Verbal comments from your tutor associated with your work
  • Generic feedback from tutors covering particular strengths/ weaknesses found in the work of a particular student group
  • Comments from other students about your work (peer feedback)
  • Your own comments and reflections on your work (self-assessment and feedback)

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

The BA programme directly addresses the recent BA QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Counselling and Psychotherapy (2013):

'As those entering the counselling and/or psychotherapy fields require understanding of a complex body of knowledge, clinical skills, self-awareness, analytical techniques and problem-solving skills, and the ability to evaluate evidence, arguments and assumptions to reach sound independent judgements, it is likely that they will need to be qualified to at least the level of a bachelor's degree with honours.' (Section 1.4).

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Where could it take you?

Employment opportunities

Our BA (Hons) Degree in Integrative Counselling is designed to enhance skills and knowledge with particular reference to employment and the development of specialist areas of interest. It provides the opportunity for advancement in a variety of counselling-related careers. Our graduates are people with the advanced theoretical and applied knowledge to make an impact on service provision.

Possible career opportunities include:

  • NHS initiatives e.g. Improving Access to Psychological Therapies (IAPT)
  • Educational institutions: schools, colleges and Universities
  • Employee Assistance Programmes (EAPS)
  • Local Authority employee services programmes
  • Charitable agencies
  • Private practice

The programme provides links with employers through the placement and work based learning component.

International Business Management

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes International Business Management at Worcester special?

Begin an exciting journey towards a fulfilling career in international business management.

You will spend a year abroad in either study or work placement. You have the option to study at one of our partner universities in Australia, Canada, Europe, New Zealand or the USA. You can opt to study foreign languages and take a one-year paid overseas placement. Our network of academic staff, business coaches, worldwide partner Universities and the Chartered Management Institute (CMI), will support you as you launch your international career.

With its focus on innovation, creativity and contemporary issues (such as globalisation, emerging markets, protectionism, demographic changes, more rapid global communications and environmental sustainability), this flexible degree will signal that you are a well-networked, culturally-aware and commercially-focussed graduate. You will be able to demonstrate that you have the knowledge of international business, the intercultural awareness, management capabilities and language skills that employers most value.

Our range of fun extra-curricular activities, such as sport clubs, societies, cultural visits and the student social scene further add to your university experience and personal development.

If you are unable to undertake the mandatory Third Year Abroad as part of BA (Hons) International Business Management and this course is no longer an option, you may wish to consider BA (Hons) Business Management instead.

Overview

Key features

  • Experience international cultures, learn a language and develop a global mind-set through a period of study abroad
  • Gain an insight into international business management and explore the latest thinking in accountancy, advertising, economics, entrepreneurship, finance, human resources, law, leadership, marketing, project management, public relations and sustainability
  • Enhance your employability through optional internships, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders
  • Work with academics who have extensive experience of international business management, consultancy or running their own business
  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute - there will be a charge for membership of the professional bodies

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one of the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and many lectures are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and staff profiles can be view at the WBS Staff Profile Page.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes.
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills. Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Where could it take you?

Our Business Management Degree offers a range of benefits to kick-start your business management career.

These include:

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad
Law

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Law at Worcester special?

Wherever you study law, it can be a challenging and rewarding subject. At Worcester, the big difference is the personal level of support we give you throughout your time here. In fact, we even build our teaching around it.

Seminar groups are small so you develop close working relationships with your lecturers - both in these groups and when role playing court procedures in our realistic facilities. You'll also get to meet solicitors, barristers and judges, who visit us as guest speakers to give you a real flavour of the profession.

Overview

Key features

  • Purpose-built facilities, including our own courtroom, to help you get used to the legal environment
  • Mooting and mock trials, where you learn how to project your voice and exude confidence - also highly valuable when applying for work experience
  • Excellent links with local law firms, so you can learn about the law in context and get excellent work experience opportunities
  • Legal Advice Centre, where you can volunteer to work with practising solicitors, gathering details from real clients on real cases and learn from the advice they receive
  • Employability skills module, including question-and-answer sessions with solicitors and barristers
  • Specialist options in Evidence, Human Rights, Employment, Disability, Company and Family Law

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

The LLB degree

The LLB degree is a Qualifying Law degree. It is accredited by the Solicitors Regulation Authority and the Bar Standards Board and covers all the foundation subjects required to pass the 'Academic Stage' - the first step in your journey to qualifying as a barrister or a solicitor.

On graduation you will be able to proceed to the Solicitors' Legal Practice Course or the Barristers' Bar Professional Training Course.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and practical exercises. Interactive workshops take a variety of forms and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and practical exercises, such as mooting and client interviewing, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applying them in a professional context.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to engage fully with the employability programme in the School of Law including volunteering in the School of Law's Legal Advice Centre.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching. Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • One 2 hour lecture
  • One 1 hour seminar

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and legal practitioners with professional experience.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and 85% of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, courtroom activities, interviewing and advising, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
4 essays
1 Court Report
1 Moot
1 Portfolio

Year 2
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
5 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentations

Year 3
4 formal examinations of 3 hours duration
4 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Practical experience

Law is constantly evolving and practical experience is one of the best ways to develop the creative and critical approach you will need to succeed.

Pro bono activity is built into the LLB at Worcester, giving you the chance to improve your legal research, public speaking and client care skills while making a genuinely positive contribution to society. You will also have the opportunity to speak to lawyers and others involved in institutions such as the courts to gain an insight into how they work.

You may also choose to develop your legal skills further by joining in extracurricular activities such as mock trials or client interviewing. You can choose to be part of the University of Worcester Student Law Society, which will be run by Law students for Law students.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and practical exercises. Interactive workshops take a variety of forms and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and practical exercises, such as mooting and client interviewing, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applying them in a professional context.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to engage fully with the employability programme in the School of Law including volunteering in the School of Law's Legal Advice Centre.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching. Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • One 2 hour lecture
  • One 1 hour seminar

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and legal practitioners with professional experience.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and 85% of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, courtroom activities, interviewing and advising, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
4 essays
1 Court Report
1 Moot
1 Portfolio

Year 2
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
5 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentations

Year 3
4 formal examinations of 3 hours duration
4 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Practical experience

Law is constantly evolving and practical experience is one of the best ways to develop the creative and critical approach you will need to succeed.

Pro bono activity is built into the LLB at Worcester, giving you the chance to improve your legal research, public speaking and client care skills while making a genuinely positive contribution to society. You will also have the opportunity to speak to lawyers and others involved in institutions such as the courts to gain an insight into how they work.

You may also choose to develop your legal skills further by joining in extracurricular activities such as mock trials or client interviewing. You can choose to be part of the University of Worcester Student Law Society, which will be run by Law students for Law students.

Law with Criminology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

  

What makes Law with Criminology at Worcester special?

LLB (Hons) Law with Criminology is a Qualifying Law degree. It is accredited by the Solicitors Regulations Authority and the Bar Standards Board and covers all the foundation subjects required to pass the 'Academic Stage' - the first step in your journey to qualifying as a barrister or a solicitor.

Law with Criminology at Worcester combines a strong foundation in core principles of law and also enables you to gain a valuable insight into related areas of Criminology. When it comes to the criminal justice system, your criminal law studies will be enhanced through criminology modules that study the causes of crime and its impact on individuals, families and society as a whole.

Overview

Key features

  • Qualifying Law Degree (QLD)
  • Enables lawyers to explore related areas of Criminology
  • Blended theoretical & practical approach brings Law to life
  • Professional volunteering opportunities develop your knowledge of how Law operates in the real world and benefit the local community
  • Supportive, encouraging environment

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

Law at Worcester

Worcester offers an intimate, collegial and diverse environment in which you will grow through your interactions with other students and with our dedicated and interdisciplinary faculty. After your time here, you will be able to think about the law systematically and be academically prepared to work at the highest levels of the profession.

With extensive instruction in the technical aspects of the profession and a broad range of practical opportunities to engage with Law in action, you will not just learn about the Law, but will learn to think like a lawyer. This practical, professional approach is further enhanced by the brand new School of Law premises with its specialist teaching facilities including a purpose built courtroom enabling students to engage in mooting, mock trials and other court based exercises.

You will also have the possibility of working with our research centres, such as the National Centre for the Study and Prevention of Violence and Abuse, to further enhance your learning and develop your experience.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and practical exercises. Interactive workshops take a variety of forms and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and practical exercises, such as mooting and client interviewing, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applying them in a professional context.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to engage fully with the employability programme in the School of Law including volunteering in the School of Law's Legal Advice Centre.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • One 2 hour lecture
  • One 1 hour seminar

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and legal practitioners with professional experience.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and 85% of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, courtroom activities, interviewing and advising, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments.'Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
4 essays
1 Court Report
1 Moot
1 Portfolio

Year 2
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
6 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Year 3
3 formal examinations of 3 hours duration
4 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate. We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Practical experience

Law is constantly evolving and practical experience is one of the best ways to develop the creative and critical approach you will need to succeed.

Pro bono activity is built into the LLB at Worcester, giving you the chance to improve your legal research, public speaking and client care skills while making a genuinely positive contribution to society. You will also have the opportunity to speak to lawyers and others involved in institutions such as the courts to gain an insight into how they work.

You may also choose to develop your legal skills further by joining in extracurricular activities such as mock trials or client interviewing. You can choose to be part of the University of Worcester Student Law Society, which will be run by Law students for Law students.

 

Where could it take you?

Employability

Employability is at the heart of Law at the University of Worcester, and we offer a wide range of opportunities to gain work experience through volunteering, mentoring schemes and placements.

We work closely with a variety of local, regional and national employers and use their expertise to input into the academic curriculum. In this way, we ensure that your Law degree is attractive to potential employers and that you have the opportunity to explore many different career options, both in the legal profession and in other areas, such as business and management.

Read more about Law careers and routes to qualifying.

 

Law with Forensic Psychology

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Law with Forensic Psychology at Worcester special?

Our Law with Forensic Psychology degree is a Qualifying Law course. The course is accredited by the Solicitors Regulations Authority and the Bar Standards Board.

Our modules cover all the foundation subjects required to pass the 'Academic Stage'. This is the first step in your journey to qualifying as a barrister or a solicitor in the criminal justice system.

This course combines a strong foundation in core principles of law and forensic psychology, including criminal law. You'll also study forensic psychology modules, exploring the tangled web of influences that lead to a criminal act.

Overview

Key features

  • Qualifying Law Degree (QLD)
  • Enables lawyers to explore related areas of forensic psychology
  • Blended theoretical & practical approach brings Law to life
  • Professional volunteering opportunities develop your knowledge of how Law operates in the real world and benefit the local community
  • Supportive, encouraging environment

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

Law at Worcester

Worcester offers an intimate, collegial and diverse environment in which you will grow through your interactions with other students and with our dedicated and interdisciplinary faculty. After your time here, you will be able to think about the law systematically and be academically prepared to work at the highest levels of the profession.

With extensive instruction in the technical aspects of the profession and a broad range of practical opportunities to engage with Law in action, you will not just learn about the Law, but will learn to think like a lawyer. This practical, professional approach is further enhanced by the brand new School of Law premises with its specialist teaching facilities including a purpose built courtroom enabling students to engage in mooting, mock trials and other court based exercises.

You will also have the possibility of working with our research centres, such as the National Centre for the Study and Prevention of Violence and Abuse, to further enhance your learning and develop your experience.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and practical exercises. Interactive workshops take a variety of forms and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and practical exercises, such as mooting and client interviewing, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applying them in a professional context.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to engage fully with the employability programme in the School of Law including volunteering in the School of Law's Legal Advice Centre.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • One 2 hour lecture
  • One 1 hour seminar

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and legal practitioners with professional experience.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and 85% of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, courtroom activities, interviewing and advising, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
4 essays
1 Court Report
1 Moot
1 Portfolio

Year 2
3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
6 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Year 3
3 formal examinations of 3 hours duration
4 essays
1 interviewing and advising exercise
1 individual presentation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Practical experience

Law is constantly evolving and practical experience is one of the best ways to develop the creative and critical approach you will need to succeed.

Pro bono activity is built into the LLB at Worcester, giving you the chance to improve your legal research, public speaking and client care skills while making a genuinely positive contribution to society. You will also have the opportunity to speak to lawyers and others involved in institutions such as the courts to gain an insight into how they work.

You may also choose to develop your legal skills further by joining in extracurricular activities such as mock trials or client interviewing. You can choose to be part of the University of Worcester Student Law Society, which will be run by Law students for Law students.

 

Where could it take you?

Employability

Our Law with Forensic Psychology degree'offers a wide range of work experience opportunities, including:

  • Volunteering
  • Mentoring schemes
  • Placements

Employability is at the heart of our Law with Forensic Psychology degree. We work closely with a variety of local, regional and national employers and use their expertise to input into the academic curriculum.

In this way, we ensure that your Law degree is attractive to potential employers in the legal profession. We'll also enable you to explore different career paths in other areas, such as business and management.

Read more about Law careers and routes to qualifying.

Law with Policing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Law with Policing at Worcester special?

LLB (Hons) Law with Policing is a Qualifying Law degree. It is accredited by the Solicitors Regulation Authority and covers all the foundation subjects required to pass the 'Academic Stage' - the first step in your journey to qualifying as a barrister or a solicitor.

Law with Policing at Worcester combines a strong foundation in core principles of law with a valuable insight into related areas of policing. The policing modules take key elements of the College of Policing Core Curriculum - a requirement for all student police officers – and combine these with forward thinking elements from other associated professional bodies.

Our policing modules will put you in a great position to pursue a career in the police force or to work alongside members of a police service. You'll learn from specialist practitioners and real-world experience, so you'll get a genuine taste of the work police officers perform on a day to day basis and work you could be doing after you graduate.

* Launching in September 2020. Subject to approval.

Overview

Key features

  • Purpose-built facilities, including our own courtroom, to help you get used to the legal environment
  • Mooting and mock trials, where you learn how to project your voice and exude confidence - also highly valuable when applying for work experience
  • Excellent links with local law firms, so you can learn about the law in context and get excellent work experience opportunities
  • Designed for individuals who wish to join the police service, prison or private security organisations
  • You'll have the opportunity to develop specific police skills and/or knowledge and critical understanding of specific areas of criminality or leadership skills

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

We enable students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, practical exercises and work placements. Interactive workshops take a variety of forms and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and practical exercises, such as mooting and client interviewing, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applying them in a professional context.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course.

You have an opportunity to engage fully with the employability programme in the School of Law including volunteering in the School of Law's Legal Advice Centre.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 12 contact hours of teaching.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Four 2 hour lectures
  • Four 1 hour seminars

Duration

  • 3 years full-time
  • 4-6 years part-time

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 25 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources such as the Westlaw and Lexis Library legal databases.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include written examinations and a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, courtroom activities, interviewing and advising, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1

  • 3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
  • 4 essays
  • 1 Court Report
  • 1 Moot
  • 1 Portfolio

Year 2

  • 3 formal examinations of 2 hours duration
  • 6 essays
  • 1 interviewing and advising exercise
  • 1 individual presentation

Year 3

  • 3 formal examinations of 3 hours duration
  • 4 essays
  • 1 interviewing and advising exercise
  • 1 individual presentation

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Where could it take you?

Students not currently employed in the legal sector are encouraged to take part in the full range of law employability activities at Worcester.

Employability is at the heart of the School of Law, and we offer a wide range of opportunities to gain work experience through volunteering, mentoring schemes and placements. We work closely with a variety of local, regional and national employers and use their expertise to input into the academic curriculum.

In this way, we ensure that your Law degree is attractive to potential employers and that you have the opportunity to explore many different career options, both in the legal profession and the criminal justice sector  and in other areas, such as business and management.

The course design is also informed by the College of Policing Curriculum and students will also be well placed to join the police force.

Please note: From 2020, all new police officers in England and Wales will need to be educated to degree level.

Marketing

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Marketing at Worcester special?

Position yourself as a specialist in the world of customer persuasion with this up-to-the-minute marketing degree. You'll be supported by regular coaching, and our team of academic staff and marketing professionals. You'll actively engage with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) and the Chartered Management Institute (CMI) as you position yourself to enter this dynamic, energetic and growing sector.

With its strong focus on innovation, creativity and contemporary issues (such as social media, personalised communications, differentiated customer experiences and customer insight gained through data analytics and big data), this specialised degree will signal that you are creative and commercially-driven. You will be able to demonstrate your marketing expertise as well as the skills that employers value.

Our range of fun extra-curricular activities, such as sport clubs, societies, cultural visits and the student social scene further add to your university experience and personal development.

Overview

Key features

  • Gain specialist insight into marketing and access a wide range of optional modules that complement your development as a marketing professional
  • Gain experience of working on digital marketing campaigns and developing websites for commercial clients through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Engage with the latest thinking through a research project supported by a member of our Customer Interactions Research Group
  • Enhance your employability through internships, consultancy projects, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders
  • Develop your own digital business idea through the Business School's Incubator
  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute and accreditation with the Chartered Institute of Marketing

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes.
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills. Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course.

The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and you can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Here are a few of the current members of the department who teach on this course:

dr-tim-sellick

Dr Tim Sellick

Tim began the development of his sales and marketing expertise as the Director of a Direct Marketing agency where he worked for over a decade. He then moved into academia after completing his Post Graduate Certificate in Education (Post Compulsory Education) delivering programmes for Birmingham City University for Undergraduate, Post Graduate, and for professional participants. Tim then joined Saïd Business School at the University of Oxford in 2009 to work in Executive Education.

Since 2011 Tim has worked at Worcester Business School where he teaches Marketing Communications, Marketing Strategy, and Sales Management.

Tim is a multi-award winning case writer and has authored a winning case in the EFMD’s Excellence in Practice Awards twice. Tim is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Marketing (and a Chartered Marketer), and a Fellow of the Higher Education Association Academy.

  • 1

Where could it take you?

Our Business Management Degree offers a range of benefits to kick-start your business management career.

These include:

  • Benefit from integrated career coaching throughout your course, where we will support you with preparation of your CV and interview technique
  • Gain professional body accreditation, exemptions and recognition
  • Create a portfolio of direct business experience through a one-year paid placement, internships, consultancy projects and company visits
  • Develop your own business through the Business School's Incubator
  • Work on live client projects through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Build your own business network
  • Learn a foreign language and experience international cultures through opportunities to work and study abroad

STUDENT VIEWS - Marketing Students

“During my degree, I obtained employability experience and credentials which helped me get a full-time job working for PepsiCo when I graduated. I work in business development, focusing upon Walkers, Tropicana and Quaker accounts. I deal with a client base of over 250 which includes workplaces, retail outlets, big stores, cash and carrys and more.” Gina Hankinson, Marketing student  

“My degree proved beyond my expectations. Its intensity and the learning styles applied in the modules such as real business case studies and presentations were stimulating and propelled students to think as professionals” Bruno Davoro, Marketing student

“I have learnt how to do business presentations, how to prepare for job interviews and how to be independent. My timetable has been very flexible through the year so I managed to find a job and have gained valuable work experience as well as covering all my living expenses. I have applied to go on the exchange programme to Australia next year and I am really looking forward to this opportunity.” Kornelija Guzaite, Marketing student.

STUDENT VIEW - Ciara Joyce

“My course was extremely useful. I loved it, and am proud to be a Worcester Alumni”. After graduating, Ciara completed a 2-month internship with a Creative agency working on the Social Media team before obtaining a position with a web-based company doing Customer Service and Social Media.

STUDENT VIEWS - Marketing Students

“During my degree, I obtained employability experience and credentials which helped me get a full-time job working for PepsiCo when I graduated. I work in business development, focusing upon Walkers, Tropicana and Quaker accounts. I deal with a client base of over 250 which includes workplaces, retail outlets, big stores, cash and carrys and more.” Gina Hankinson, Marketing student  

“My degree proved beyond my expectations. Its intensity and the learning styles applied in the modules such as real business case studies and presentations were stimulating and propelled students to think as professionals” Bruno Davoro, Marketing student

“I have learnt how to do business presentations, how to prepare for job interviews and how to be independent. My timetable has been very flexible through the year so I managed to find a job and have gained valuable work experience as well as covering all my living expenses. I have applied to go on the exchange programme to Australia next year and I am really looking forward to this opportunity.” Kornelija Guzaite, Marketing student.

STUDENT VIEW - Ciara Joyce

“My course was extremely useful. I loved it, and am proud to be a Worcester Alumni”. After graduating, Ciara completed a 2-month internship with a Creative agency working on the Social Media team before obtaining a position with a web-based company doing Customer Service and Social Media.

STUDENT VIEWS - Marketing Students

“During my degree, I obtained employability experience and credentials which helped me get a full-time job working for PepsiCo when I graduated. I work in business development, focusing upon Walkers, Tropicana and Quaker accounts. I deal with a client base of over 250 which includes workplaces, retail outlets, big stores, cash and carrys and more.” Gina Hankinson, Marketing student  

“My degree proved beyond my expectations. Its intensity and the learning styles applied in the modules such as real business case studies and presentations were stimulating and propelled students to think as professionals” Bruno Davoro, Marketing student

“I have learnt how to do business presentations, how to prepare for job interviews and how to be independent. My timetable has been very flexible through the year so I managed to find a job and have gained valuable work experience as well as covering all my living expenses. I have applied to go on the exchange programme to Australia next year and I am really looking forward to this opportunity.” Kornelija Guzaite, Marketing student.

Marketing, Advertising and Public Relations

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Marketing, Advertising & Public Relations at Worcester special?

Equip yourself for a challenging career in the fast-paced and fast growth marketing communications industry. It is also recognised by the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR) as career-relevant.

You'll learn from our team of specialist academic staff and marketing communications professionals and be supported by regular career coaching. You'll actively engage with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) and the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR) as you position yourself to enter this highly creative sector.

With its strong focus on innovation, creativity and contemporary issues, (such as digital communications, social media, instant gratification and globalisation), this highly-specialised degree will signal that you are creative, focused and commercially-driven. You will be able to demonstrate your marketing communications expertise alongside the skills most valued by employers. You will gain 'real-world' experience through working on communications campaigns for commercial clients through our Media Lab.

You will engage with the latest thinking through a research project supported by a member of our Customer Interactions Research Group.

Please note: There will be a charge for membership of professional bodies.

Overview

Key features

  • 100% overall student satisfaction for Marketing, Advertising and Public Relations (NSS 2018 and 2019)
  • Enhance your employability through internships, consultancy projects, a one-year paid placement and integrated coaching from experienced business leaders
  • Gain experience of working on digital marketing campaigns and developing websites for commercial clients through the Business School's Media Lab
  • Experience international cultures and develop a global mind-set through options to work and study abroad
  • Gain Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute and accreditation through the Chartered Institute of Marketing and Chartered Institute of Public Relations

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY100% satisfaction logo

This course received 100% overall student satisfaction (NSS 2019)

MORE ABOUT OUR NSS RESULTS

Worcester Business School 

Benefits to our students:

  • Gain insight into the related marketing communications disciplines of marketing, advertising and public relations and how they contribute to the creation of brand value
  • Work with academics and marketing communications professionals who have extensive experience of management, consultancy or running their own business
  • Study within a supportive learning community with access to excellent learning resources in purpose-built facilities
  • Engage with the latest thinking through a research project supported by a member of our Customer Interactions Research Group

Transforming individuals to thrive in the 21st Century

  • Through a flexible, work-related curriculum that develops knowledge, skills, the ability to continually learn, think critically, reflect, innovate, act responsibly and adapt to volatile, ambiguous and complex situations
  • Through meaningful engagement with business to develop professional behaviours
  • Through a focus on creativity, innovation and promoting entrepreneurial thinking
  • Through exposure to intercultural and international contexts to develop a global mind-set
  • Through applying contemporary research, scholarship and the latest thinking
  • Through a supportive and collaborative learning community
  • Through accessible learning resources and purpose-built facilities

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching, academic support through integrated coaching and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Accreditation

All of our courses and modules have been mapped to take advantage of professional body accreditations: see individual course pages for further details.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars, laboratory practical sessions, fieldwork, practical activities, etc. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities. Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and laboratory practical sessions are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

In addition, meetings (both individual and group) with personal academic tutors are scheduled throughout the academic year. There is an opportunity to undertake a year-long placement in the third year of the course, supervised by a work-based mentor and a University tutor. Depending upon the course, there may be an opportunity to study abroad at one the exchange partner universities.

Contact time

In a typical week there will be at least 12 hours of timetabled teaching in lectures, seminars and small-group work. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected. If the degree requires a Research or Consultancy Project, students will have guided supervision time with a Project Supervisor.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Information giving, facilitated discussions, small group work, presentations
  • Practical skills - the opportunity to practise group facilitation, presentation, communication and listening skills
  • Visiting speakers and opportunities to visit other settings are regular features of the course.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full-time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week, plus additional preparation for assessments and examinations. Typically, this will involve meeting with individual tutors to discuss progress and feedback, completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online. In addition to this, students will spend time sharing ideas with fellow students, taking part in extra-curricular learning activities and engaging with external employers.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources as well as our network of employers and entrepreneurs.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and many lectures are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and staff profiles can be view at the WBS Staff Profile Page.

Assessment

The precise assessment requirements in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken. The assessment strategy has been designed so that:

  • All modules have both formative and summative assessment elements. Formative assessment allows tutors and students to recognise strengths and weaknesses in learning and to address those issues immediately. Summative assessments are graded and count towards the final module grade, and they are assessed against the specific module learning outcomes.
  • Typically 15 credit/ one semester modules will have one assessment item; 30 credit/ two semester modules will have 2-3 assessments
  • Across each individual year and cumulatively across all three years the concept of continuous assessment and/or building up expertise in different assessment types applies. A variety of assessment types (reports, portfolios, presentations, essays and a final year research or consultancy project) are designed to suit different learning styles
  • There may be some specialisation by subject: e.g. exams are more common in Accounting, Finance and Economics modules because the professional bodies prefer this method of assessment for exemption/ accreditation purposes and many of our modules are linked to those bodies in order to obtain such exemption/ accreditation
  • Different types of employability skills are embedded in all modules.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal coursework assessments. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader.

Feedback is intended to support learning by indicating how you can improve in future assignments and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors to help support personal and academic development and enhance employability skills. Feedback on formal course work assessments is normally provided within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course.

The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience and business leaders and employers.

This degree will prepare you to work on either the client or agency side of the marcomms industry. A wide range of roles exist in this sector, including:

  • Advertising account executive
  • Market researcher
  • Marketing executive
  • Media buyer/ planner
  • Public affairs consultant
  • PR executive
  • Sales promotion officer
Mathematics and Computer Science

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Mathematics and Computer Science at Worcester special?

Have you ever wondered about how cyber security and cryptography work, how Google ranks the results of a webpage search, how 3D computer graphics scenes are rendered, how robots can learn to walk or computers learn to play chess, how sports leagues are constructed, or how predictions or insights can be made from Big Data?

This course brings together fundamental skills in mathematics, modelling, algorithms, programming, logic, computational thinking, machine learning, and data science, to tackle questions like these. We focus on the mathematics relevant to practical modelling, deeper understanding of algorithms in computer science, and the computational thinking of data science.

Launching in September 2020

Overview

Key features

  • Covers the core syllabus of university-level Mathematics and Computer Science degrees.
  • Optional modules including data science, cyber security, robotics, meteorology, and remote sensing.
  • Additional modules featuring mini-projects in mathematical modelling and data analysis.
  • Develop transferable skills in using mathematical software packages, conducting research and communication.
  • Opportunity to apply skills and knowledge from across the whole course in an applied final-year project.
  • Work placement opportunities with companies such as Bosch, IBM and Clearview.

How will you be taught?

You are taught through a combination of interactive lectures, group tutorials, computer labs, directed reading and formative assessments. The group tutorials and formative assessments involve practice at problem solving and applying what you are learning to real-world scenarios and practical applications. Computer labs focus on developing practical skills in modelling, programming, data analysis, project management, and communication. In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors will take place several times a semester during your time at university.

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services, and also the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you to flourish and be successful.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 14-16 hours of timetabled (face-to-face) teaching in lectures, group tutorials and computer labs. These are sessions where students are supported by lecturers and tutors in a lecture room or computer lab. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected.

Independent self study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 20-25 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve problem solving in formative assessments, completing online activities, discussions with your fellow students, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Duration

  • 3 years full-time
  • 4-6 years part-time
  • 4 years full-time including one year placement

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics, professional practitioners with industry experience, and visiting speakers with specialised expertise. Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy work carried out by staff and you can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade. Assessment methods include written examinations, practical tests and a range of coursework assessments such as reports, portfolios, presentations, posters, and a final-year project. The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Examples of possible future career paths include: data scientist, software developer, mathematical modeller, game designer, actuary, market researcher, management consultant, transport planner, cryptologist, auditor, tax advisor, systems analyst, engineer, teacher, statistician, government analyst, operational researcher, accountant, cartographer, and meteorologist.

Midwifery

A Undergraduate Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Midwifery at Worcester special?

Midwives enjoy the unique privilege of a career caring for mothers, their babies and the whole family. At Worcester you will not only gain the skills and experience needed to become a confident, competent and caring midwife, you will also develop the intellectual tools to help you shape the future direction of the profession by generating new ideas and evaluating innovative ways of working.

Overview

Key features

  • Successful completion of the programme leads to the dual awards of a BSc Honours degree and professional registration with the Nursing and Midwifery Council
  • UNICEF Baby Friendly Initiative accredited course
  • 50/50 mix of theory and practice gives you a wide range of academic and placement opportunities
  • 45 week course with 7 weeks designated annual leave
  • Working with 4 trust partners
  • Supportive learning environment: on placement you will be assigned a mentor, whose shift patterns you will mirror
  • Our lecturers are experienced midwives who are supported by professionals from across the maternity service. Giving you access to specialist knowledge in a range of areas, including perinatal mental health, bereavement, genomics and leadership.
  • Study in a dedicated skills and simulation building
  • The course is subject to re-approval by the Nursing and Midwifery Council which is in the process of introducing new standards for midwifery education. 
  • Register your interest

    Enter your details below and we will keep you up to date with information about places on the Midwifery course, Open Days and other useful course-related information.

Taster Days

15/10/19 and 16/10/19   

Join us for a Midwifery Taster Day and learn about the values and skills that underpin the profession  

To book a place please email Diane Prah: d.prah@worc.ac.uk

What will you study?

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. 

Here is a broad outline of the current course:

Year 1

  • Lifelong learning 1 (30 Credits)
  • Theoretical foundations of midwifery 1 (30 Credits)
  • Midwifery practice 1 (60 Credits)

Year 2

  • Lifelong learning 2 (30 Credits)
  • Theoretical foundations of midwifery 2 (30 Credits)
  • Midwifery practice 2 (60 Credits)

Year 3

  • Lifelong learning 3 (30 Credits)
  • Theoretical foundations of midwifery 3 (30 Credits)
  • Midwifery practice 3 (60 Credits)

Student stories

Lindsay and Martha talk about their experiences of Midwifery at Worcester.

 

The midwifery curriculum is delivered using an enquiry based learning approach (EBL). This active learning method encourages students to work together to explore specifically designed clinical triggers. The EBL process develops collaborative working so students ask key questions and then locate the resources to answer them. Students challenge and question practice through the acquisition of skills that support personal and professional growth.

The knowledge generated by the EBL activities support the module learning outcomes. Three modules span each year of the course.

The Midwifery course runs during 45 weeks each year with seven designated annual leave weeks.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

The midwifery curriculum is delivered using an enquiry based learning approach (EBL). This active learning method encourages students to work together to explore specifically designed clinical enquiries. These increase in complexity as you progress through the course moving from normal birth in year 1 to complex birth in year 2 and working towards being an autonomous practitioner in year 3.

The EBL process encourages students to identify key questions and locate the resources to answer them. Working in small groups students develop sophisticated teamwork and communication skills and, with tutor support, find that shared learning promotes personal and professional development. EBL helps students to apply theory to practice and to acquire the skills needed for development as evidence-based practitioners able to individualise the care that they give.

The knowledge generated by the EBL activities support the module learning outcomes. Three modules span each year of the course. The Midwifery course runs during 45 weeks each year with seven designated annual leave weeks.

The curriculum content supports students to develop the knowledge, skills and attitudes for safe and effective practice, as identified by the Nursing and Midwifery Council. You will learn how to:

  • Care compassionately and competently for low risk women and their babies
  • Care compassionately and competently for high risk women and their babies
  • Make evidence based decisions to support high quality and sensitive care
  • Promote health for the individual, family and community
  • Identify and sustain your role as a professional
  • Promote the values of the University and the NHS Constitution

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are normally scheduled on at least 5 occasions in each year.

You have an opportunity to discuss how you are settling into University life, adapting to the course and gain feedback and support to complete academic and practice assessments.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 3 days (18 hours) contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the timetable and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically each year will involve approximately 400 scheduled study hours and approximately 270 independent study hours. In addition you will undertake 2448 hours over 3 years in clinical practice.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Lectures
  • Seminars
  • Workshops
  • Resource locating - gathering information
  • Group work
  • Group tutorials

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 12 hours of personal self-study per week (see above). Typically, this will involve working in groups if you wish but most likely to involve self-directed study, either at home or in the library.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Teaching staff

The teaching team is educated to Master's level and have experience of carrying out primary research. About a third of the team has, or is working towards a PhD. Staff lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification and are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy. You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

  • Assessments each year are an unseen written examination, group presentation with individual paper, e-portfolio and clinical practice. An independent study replaces the e-portfolio in year 3.
  • 50% of your learning takes place at university facilitated by the midwifery teaching team; 50% takes place in clinical practice supported by mentors.
  • Clinical practice learning will take place in allocated placements that include labour ward, ante and post-natal wards, community and antenatal clinic. You should expect to gain practice experience in both Herefordshire & Worcestershire, therefore some travelling across these counties is required. There are a small number of practice placements in Gloucestershire and the West Midlands.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

 

Where could it take you?

Students who complete this course successfully will become Registered Midwives. Employment opportunities exist locally, nationally and internationally. In most parts of the UK, midwives can expect to secure their first post within the NHS on a band 5 salary scale.

Once you have successfully completed the course, how you develop your career is entirely up to you. The work of the midwife is diverse and you could find work in a low risk free standing birth centre, consultant led unit or a community setting. You also have the opportunity to move into other areas of practice such as teaching, research or management.

Graduates can undertake further masters level study at the University of Worcester. The Masters in Advanced Clinical Practice, for example, offers midwives the opportunity to enhance their skills and knowledge by undertaking the Professional Advocate Programme. The Newborn and Infant Physical Examination qualification is also available at postgraduate level.   

Adapted Sports

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Adapted Sport MSc at Worcester special?

Launching in September 2020

The programme aims to equip you with the necessary and desirable skills with which to attain graduate employment in the field of Adapted Sport, with a specialist focus on disability sport or broader associated fields of employment. Specifically, there are opportunities for you to specialise in developing a variety of skills including their coaching, pedagogical and practical skills throughout the course.

Distinctive features of the course include that this is the first of its type in the UK to offer students the chance to develop their knowledge within inclusive sport.

Overview

Key features

  • International Partnership opportunities
  • China/Beijing memorandum of understanding and exchange programme
  • Relationships and internships with Professional clubs
  • Links with NGB’s
  • Delivery in world class inclusive facilities

What will you study?

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. If there are insufficient numbers of students interested in an optional module, this might not be offered, but we will advise you as soon as possible and help you choose an alternative. 

What will you study and when?

An example of the structure which will be followed by a full time student would be:

  • 2 x 30 credit pathway specific modules to be taken in semester 1 (September – January)
  • 1 x 30 credit Leading and managing people module in semester 2 (January – May)
  • 1 x 30 credit Work-based placement module in semester 2 (January – May)
  • 1 x 60 credit dissertation module including research methods to be taken between May and September

Part time students would normally complete the course over 2 years:

  • In Year 1 they would take 1 pathway specific module in semester 1, and Leading and Managing People in semester 2.
  • In Year 2 they would take 1 pathway specific module in semester 1, complete their placement in semester 2, and their dissertation over the summer.

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and by feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course.  If there are insufficient numbers of students interested in an optional module, this might not be offered, but we will advise you as soon as possible and help you choose an alternative.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments. 

Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.  Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, performance, presentations and a final dissertation. The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the course selected.

Where could it take you?

The School of Sport and Exercise Science (SSES) approach to developing employability is aligned to the University ‘Student Employability Supporting Statement for the Learning, Teaching and Assessment Strategy’. The University of Worcester has adopted the following definition of employability as: “A set of achievements – skills, understandings and personal attributes – that makes graduates more likely to gain employment and be successful in their chosen occupation, which benefits themselves, the workforce, the community and the economy”, (Yorke, 2006)

Sports graduates have gone on to gain employment in the following areas: Sport Community coaching (including disability coaching career opportunities); Sport scientist; Strength and conditioning coach; clinical exercise physiologist; Sport performance coaching; Sport Development officers; Sports Marketing; Performance Analysis; PE teaching; Armed forces & Police; Coaching business start-up; Graduate level employment in the Private, public and voluntary sectors.

Advanced Clinical Practice

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Advanced Clinical Practice MSc at Worcester special?

The MSc Advanced Clinical Practice (ACP) supports registered healthcare practitioners in their continued professional development to Masters Level, focusing on their role, sector and specialist area in line with the NHSE (2017) Multi-professional ACP framework. At the beginning of the course, students will identify their own learning needs in collaboration with their Clinical Supervisor, Manager and Personal Academic Tutor to create an individualised route through the programme that builds on their existing knowledge, skills and experience, whilst enabling achievement of competence and capability at the level of an Advanced Clinical Practitioner.

Additionally, students can choose to develop more specialist competencies (e.g. College of Emergency Medicine ACP competencies) through the Negotiated Learning Module; or can apply to transfer existing Level 7 credits from modules congruent with their clinical specialism, through the Recognition of Prior Learning route in place of the Negotiated Learning module. Students completing this course will be able to lead and support advanced clinical practice, facilitating change in patient and service outcomes.

Overview

Key features

  • Options to develop individualised learning plans in collaboration with your employer to ensure you develop clinical competence in your own speciality, sector and setting.
  • A learning environment in which you develop a sustainable ability to shape future health and social care provision and delivery through responsiveness, improvability and changeability.
  • We offer opportunities for you to develop and demonstrate competence and capability at an advanced level; through supervision and support in the workplace and assessment of your competence and capability.
  • We provide a flexible, multi-professional, route to postgraduate achievement centred around you. 
  • We encourage intellectual challenge through the promotion of critical analysis, evaluation and problem solving and functioning at an advanced level of practice.
  • We provide the possibility to design and conduct, with support, a substantive, independent, service improvement project, in response to organisational need, with the potential to innovate new practices and influence change. 
  • We promote opportunities for career advancement as an Advanced Clinical Practitioner.

The objective of the programme is summarised in the West Midlands Advanced Clinical Practice (Health Education England 2015, p.15) definition and in line with the Multi-Professional 

framework for ACP (NHS England 2017) to develop:

‘A registered practitioner with an expert knowledge base, complex decision-making skills and clinical competencies for expanded autonomous scope of practice, the characteristics of which are shaped by the context in which the individual practices. Demonstrable at masters’ level and meets the education, training and CPD requirements for Advanced Clinical Practice as identified within the framework’.

How will you be taught?

As a university we place great emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services, and the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you to flourish and be successful.

This is split between practice and academic assessment with electronic submission of your work. The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments.  Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessment which is graded and counts towards the overall module grade.  

Assessment methods include essays, assessed problem-based learning, seminars, research proposal, portfolio, research project, e-presentation, Objective Structured Clinical Examinations (OSCE), assessment of clinical competence, oral presentations, exams.

The summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is typically:

Year 1

Essay, clinical competency and e- portfolio, OSCE, oral presentation and report

Year 2

Essay, Research/Project Proposal, and if taking the Prescribing module, case study, pharmacology exam, numeracy exam

Year 3

15,000-word Dissertation

Feedback

You will receive feedback on formative assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

You will receive feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Where could it take you?

Postgraduate study will mark you out in today's competitive job market, showing that you have enhanced knowledge in this subject area, as well as highlighting your ability to analyse, communicate and apply theory - all skills which are sought after by employers.

This programme is developed in partnership with local employers and as such is closely mapped to both the needs of the student and the needs of the employer. This ensures that you'll complete the course with specific, focused skills that are desirable to local employers and the wider health and social care community.

All of our students join the programme from practice, develop their skills and understanding through the programme and return to practice with these developed qualities and attributes tailor made to the Advanced Clinical Practitioner role and role trajectory.

As part of the journey of professional and role development we encourage students to continue on their academic journey through access to a range of higher degrees including PhD, clinical doctorate and other taught doctorates.

 

Applied Health and Social Care

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Applied Health & Social Care at Worcester special?

The Applied Health and Social Care Top-up degree will advance your knowledge and practice to prepare you for a career in health, care or welfare sectors. The programme is open to those who have completed a foundation degree or diploma who are looking to achieve an honours level qualification. This course will help you to apply compassion and human dignity to improve the welfare and wellbeing of service users.

Key features

  • Available as a 1-year (full-time) or 2-year (part-time) degree
  • Benefit from the strong practice links already established across the institute and engage with practitioners and service managers
  • Opportunities to develop networks across health, care and social welfare sectors
  • Supervisor support for your Independent Study
  • A supportive environment for those who wish to top-up their foundation degree or return to education

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

"Thank you to you all for your help and encouragement over the past academic year. I feel I have gained a great deal from my time at u

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments, which are graded and count towards the overall module grade. Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, presentations and a final year independent studies project.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for the course is:

  • 1 Major independent study project of approximately 8000 to 12000 words
  • 7 summative essays ranging from 500 to 3500 words
  • 1 report
  • 1 individual or group presentation
  • 1 media tool

Where could it take you?

Study at Level 6 enables you to secure knowledge and experience within your field of interest. Students who successfully complete this course will have access to a wide range of employment opportunities, such as:

  • Statutory, voluntary and independent sector health and social services
  • Statutory and voluntary sector organisations working with older people, families and people with disabilities
  • Advice and guidance services
  • Advocacy and social justice services
  • Social enterprise
  • Housing support services targeting young people
  • Community based provision and services
  • Health promotion services
  • Welfare services
  • Care services

On completion of your award you may also consider further study at Masters level. Relevant Masters Programmes include:

  • MA Social Work
  • MA Transformative Practice
  • MSc Public Health
  • MA Social Work and Community Practice

 

Applied Sport Performance Analysis

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Applied Sports Performance Analysis MSc at Worcester special?

Over the past decade the sports science discipline of Performance Analysis has seen a rapid growth at both elite and grass roots levels. Our course has been specifically designed to provide you with the knowledge and skills needed to thrive as a Performance Analyst.

At Worcester you will have access to the latest software and hardware, giving you experience of new and emerging technologies at the forefront of the discipline. The applied nature of the course forms the core of the programme with a significant part being vocationally based.

The course content builds on the foundational skills and theory learnt on an undergraduate degree course in sports coaching, sports science or performance analysis. Enabling you to obtain the essential skills, knowledge and experience to enter employment.

Overview

Key features

  • Heavy emphasis on development and application of the applied skills of a performance analyst
  • Strong links to professional sports clubs and organisations
  • Excellent facilities, including two performance analysis laboratories, Motion & Performance Centre, McClelland Health & Wellbeing Centre, 2,000-seat sports arena, two indoor sports centres, floodlit 3G astro, floodlit synthetic pitch, exercise physiology suite (BASES accredited), sports science laboratories, gymnasia and dance studio
  • Full or part-time options, with a flexible modular scheme so that you can study at your own pace

What will you study?

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. If there are insufficient numbers of students interested in an optional module, this might not be offered, but we will advise you as soon as possible and help you choose an alternative. 

Modules

  • Evidence-Informed Performance Analysis
  • The Role of the Analyst
  • Future Directions in Performance Analysis of Sport
  • Professional Placement
  • Sport Research Project

The MSc Sport (Applied Performance Analysis) has been specifically designed for students wishing to progress in their careers as a sports performance analysts, in either an athlete support or a research role. Sports performance analysis is an objective way of observing and recording performances to quantify key performance elements in a valid and consistent manner to inform future practice. 

Sports performance analysts are now employed by virtually every professional club to provide coaches, athletes and other support staff with objective data to aid in improve sporting performance. Roles that sports performance analysts typically fulfil include coding performances to prepare reports and videos to evaluate past and/or future performances, identifying trends and patterns between teams/individuals through statistical analyses, using objective performance data to answer key performance related questions posed by coaches, players and/or other performance related staff etc.

In particular, the course aims to facilitate the development of theoretical and practical knowledge, understanding and professional skills of sport performance analysts working in or hoping to work in the sports performance industry. With this in mind the primary focus of content and the flexible learning delivery method is related to developing and enhancing the competencies of an applied sports performance analyst. This specific focus provides students with a greater depth of understanding and technical skills and will better prepare students to further their careers in the highly competitive field of applied sports performance analysis.

How will you be taught?

We place emphasis on enabling you to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include eportfolios, presentations, essays and frequent opportunities to negotiate assessment task formats.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Where could it take you?

University of Worcester graduates in the field of performance analysis have continued to study higher level qualifications at both UW and other institutions across the UK. Many have found employment within professional sports clubs and some have extended their internship into a part-time paid role. 

The success of students studying on this programme has primarily been based within elite sport but has also been as diverse as local authority organisations (performance analyst role). The course has a strong record of helping students gain employment upon completion of studies.

Upon successful completion of the Masters Programme, students have gained first employment, promotion within their own organisation, gained international employment or move to a senior management position in other organisations. The Masters also provides a platform to other research/higher degrees in sport and promotion in other professional organisations. The completion of the Masters may also provide students with the ability to enhance their current working practices. 

Ben Cresswell is smiling and looking into the camera

Ben Cresswell

Academy Data Insights Technician at Southampton Football Club

“The University offered a specialised Performance Analysis course where I could develop knowledge of the theory of analysis alongside the practical skills required to be an analyst. I was able to work in a professional sporting environment where you could link the applied work to your University work was beneficial to develop the skills of an analyst in a real-world environment.

“The curriculum we followed was very closely aligned to the requirements of a working analyst which ensured we were prepared to work following completion of this. Completing an Internship at Birmingham City during this time also introduced me to how analysis could be applied in a sporting setting. This experience in a sporting environment was invaluable when it comes to the skills I developed over this period.

“As the course put me alongside a group of people wanting to get into analysis, it was a great use to be able to interact with others on the course to either run new ideas past or help when I was struggling with something.”

Katie Sorenson

Katie Sorenson

U9-U12 Performance Analyst at Manchester City Football Club

“The MSc course has helped me with projects within my role at Southend United. At university, I especially enjoyed the Work Based Project modules, as it allowed me to apply my knowledge into a professional analysis setting. I did a project on set pieces within my club, which had a very positive outcome within my club.

“We were able to score more goals from set pieces as we found what suited our players and style of play, and we conceded less opportunities when defending set pieces. Another module, which focussed on feedback with coaches, has ensured I have improved how I inform the coaching process with my analytical insight. 

“The structure allowed me to work at my placement as well as play semi-pro football. Without the structure of course, I would not have been able to balance the three. I missed a few lectures due to work/football commitments, but it was available for me to catch up on and go over the lectures the next day. It meant I could be flexible, and didn't have to stress.

“The intensive weeks were great as it was great to meet everyone in September and then catch up with everyone again when it came to the January intensive week. It was great to see how everyone had grown within their roles at their clubs, through the aid of the MSc course. I have managed to stay in good contact with a few of the course. We continue to share code windows, ideas and analytical insight. As well as continuing to talk about jobs that come up at clubs!”

Matt Lewis

Matthew Lewis

Senior First Team Performance Analyst at Norwich City Football Club

"My journey as a performance analyst began during my undergraduate degree in Sport Coaching at the University of Worcester. I enjoyed the experience so much that I went back for postgraduate study where I specialised in performance analysis.

"The industry links of the staff ensured that there were many opportunities for me to gain applied experience within the performance analysis industry, as well as ensuring that what we were taught was relevant to what analysts did. The placement opportunities gave me a real taste for the life as a performance analyst as well as helping me grow and develop – improving my knowledge and understanding of not only the theory but practices of analysts too. Staff were always willing to help and support me along the way.

"Studying as a distance learner allowed me to be located at a football club without the necessity to travel to Worcester for all of my lectures and tutorials. The staff are incredibly helpful and go above and beyond to support me as the student, creating time for online tutorials, telephone calls and replying to my emails to ensure I feel comfortable with the tasks in hand. The facilities and resources are of the highest quality. The two performance analysis labs are fully equipped with the latest hardware and software and provide a great space to work in.

"I would certainly recommend the MSc programmes at the University of Worcester, especially completing academic study alongside an applied placement opportunity. Being able to apply theoretical knowledge to practical activity is so beneficial and increases the chances of obtaining full time employment. This provides a real edge on other courses at other institutions. I feel there wouldn’t have been a better place to learn and develop skills, not only academically, but ‘in the real world’."

Danny Barham

Danny Barham

Head of Academy Performance Analysis & Data at Birmingham City Football Club

"The MSc in Applied Performance Analysis course has helped me add academic rigour and understanding behind my practices and processes. This is so important when dealing with senior members of staff and coaches in the professional environment.

"The best thing about the course was the fact that a large proportion of the content is accessible online allowed me to manage my full-time work at the club with my studies which is imperative as the football industry is so demanding.

"A lot of the analysts on the course are practising analysts in other environments and having established relationships with them only aids club-to-club idea sharing. This is so important to growing our industry!"

mukesh talwar is wearing sports kit and standing against a green background.

Mukesh Talwar

U18 Performance Analyst at Birmingham City Football Club

"This MSc Course has provided me a greater insight of Performance Analysis. It has taught me many of the significant factors of how analysis fits within the world of sport i.e. The coaching process and the tools and mechanisms used. The course has helped me with the development of the players I have been working with.

I am currently working with the Under 18’s at Birmingham City Football Club and this course has been very useful in relation to my daily work, such as the delivery and feedback process for athletes. I have been able to use evidence-based literature to rationalise my decision-making process within my working environment, applying theory into a practical setting and vice versa, which has enabled me to make real impact to the coaching process.

One of the best things about the MSc is that it’s built around you. Working within a professional football environment where you are working 6/7 days a week for numerous hours it would be difficult to attend lectures on a weekly basis. However, with this MSc course you have interactive online lecturers which you can view from the comfort of your home or at work. If you can’t watch a lecture on the day, you can view it within the week to catch up on anything that you have missed.

The course has fantastic lecturers which is a bonus. They are easily contactable for any concerns that you might have and, from my own personal experience, they have been very helpful during my time on the course."

Arts and Design

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 1 Year.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Art and Design.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in recent years. We aim to produce research that is distinctive, socially and culturally relevant, and that influences national agendas. We continually strive to develop new areas of research excellence while, in certain areas, our work has already been acknowledged as world-leading.

The Illustration team have wide ranging expertise in illustration and popular image culture, including book illustration, street literature, narrative illustration and the cultural history of illustration. Our staff have particular expertise in Performance, Sound Art, and Installation.

Overview

Key features

  • Benefit from the International Centre for the Picture Book in Society and the peer reviewed Journal of Illustration, which are both based at the University of Worcester. 

  • Available as a full-time or part-time course (completed over a maximum of six years).

  • Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

  • All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme, focused around a range of themes.

How will you be taught?

Supervision areas

The School of Arts has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have particular expertise in Performance, Sound Art, and Installation. The International Centre for the Picture Book in Society and the peer reviewed Journal of Illustration are both based at the University of Worcester. The Illustration team have wide ranging expertise in illustration and popular image culture, including book illustration, street literature, narrative illustration and the cultural history of illustration.

Current MPhil/PhD research projects in Art include an investigation into the application of systemized colour arrangements to apprehend visual structures in narrative painting.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities. The Art and Design team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project, including a purpose built art studio with dedicated studio space and computer suites with software for animation, image creation, multimedia, and graphic and web design.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP). This is a core curriculum of training and development which provides you with the general and subject-specific knowledge. You'll also gain the skills and behaviours needed to support you in the completion of your research degree.

At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP.

You'll need to complete this training in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year.

All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Counselling

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,621.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Counselling MSc at Worcester special?

If you're passionate about therapeutic care, our Counselling MSc will bring you a step closer to a career in counselling or clinical psychology. You will strengthen your theoretical knowledge, debate issues and hone your research skills, all of which you can apply to your career in healthcare. The course will prepare you for a range of therapeutic occupations across the statutory, private and voluntary sectors.

You can tailor your course to your preferences by choosing from a number of pathways. You also have the option to study part-time, providing you with a flexible degree that can fit alongside your busy life. After you've completed the course, you'll be able to register for professional training or further study. Whatever your career interests may be, we will support you to become a confident and experienced counselling practitioner.

Overview

Key features

  • Available as a full-time (one year) or part-time (up to six years) course.
  • The opportunity to complete Intermediate Counselling Awards, providing flexibility for our students.
  • A combination of teaching methods including group seminars, lead lectures, individual tutorials and online resources.
  • Staff with extensive experience in a range of psychology and psychotherapeutic settings.
  • Progress to further study on a Clinical or Counselling psychology Doctorate courses.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of on-campus lectures and self-directed study tasks. All lectures are held on a Friday and Saturday, the date depends on your module choice. The days involve engaging with different learning activities, such as lectures, practical tasks (individual and/or group), discussion and reflection.

In addition, meetings with your allocated personal academic tutor and your research supervisor are scheduled when required and in line with the module handbook.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 13 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the modules selected and whether you have opted for full-time or part-time tuition. Friday lectures are scheduled from 09:30 - 16:30 and Saturday lectures are scheduled for 10:00 - 14:00

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • Lecturers on a Friday and Saturday. Each module has four lectures and self-directed study tasks that link with the assignments for each module. The module specification for each module outlines the taught and self-directed elements of each and is available for students on Blackboard.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake personal self-study. Typically, this will involve further reading on each module and additional reading and research to complete each module's assessments. Assessments may consist of written essays, individual presentations, poster presentation and case study work.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. There is also additional reading and resources on the module's Blackboard site, which will be available once you register for the module.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes counselling psychologists, counsellors, psychotherapists and specialist professionals in a variety of therapeutic treatments.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and all of our lecturers are practitioners with significant training and skills in their area of expertise.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments, which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include essays, case studies, practical skills work, data analysis, research reports, seminar papers and presentations. A 15,000 - 20,000 word Independent Research Project is required for the MSc award.

This programme has an 80% attendance requirement in order to be completed successfully.

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Intermediate awards

Two intermediate awards are available if you are unable to commit the time required to gain the Masters award:

  • Postgraduate Certificate in Counselling Studies (successful completion of three modules)
  • Postgraduate Diploma in Counselling (successful completion of six modules)

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Our programme will prepare you for a range of therapeutic occupations across the statutory, private and voluntary sectors.

You can also progress to further study, providing a strong platform for a Clinical or Counselling psychology Doctorate courses.

 

Creative Media

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,621.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes the Masters in Creative Media at Worcester special?

Our Creative Practice MA is open to professionals and graduates who aspire to meet the evolving demands of contemporary creative practice. You will gain strong theoretical and cultural contextual knowledge and will hone your conceptual thinking and innovation. This course will enhance your career prospects in the creative industries and enable you to become an effective and confident practitioner.

Overview

Key features

  • A stimulating opportunity to work alongside practitioners from a variety of disciplines
  • A broad-ranging course that expands your creative horizons
  • An impressive range of media resources and studios
  • Strong theoretical, experimental and professional practice strands
  • Tutors with strong industry experience and a proven professional track record

How will you be taught?

You are taught through a combination of lectures, interactive presentations of your work, tutorials and workshops that are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion, tutorial guidance and small group activities in workshops. Presentations and tutorials enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures.

You will be expected to take responsibility for engagement with your learning experience but this will be supported continuously by close tutorial guidance.

You will have access to industry-standard design and filmmaking software on Apple Macintosh computers in the MA Room and also be able to use the broadcast standard video and photographic studios and sound mixing facilities in the Digital Arts Centre.

By agreement with the module tutors, you will be able to sit in on undergraduate module sessions in order to achieve additional subject skills.

Practitioners from the industry will give talks on their work and provide input on the Professional Practice module.

Contact time

In a typical week, you will have around eight contact hours of teaching through two module sessions. This represents two half days per week in each semester. Lecturers will give further support by email if a student requests this.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 16 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online and preparing coursework assignments and presentations.

In addition to the Digital Arts Centre resources, a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources, support independent learning.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments.

Each module has one formal or 'summative' assessment that is graded and count towards the final module grade. Assessment methods include practical projects, essays and reports. The summer Independent Project is the equivalent of the dissertation and is a self-directed investigation, originated by the student, in the form of a major practical project supported by a 5,000 word critical evaluation.

Feedback

Students will receive detailed feedback on all module assignments. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Exterior view of the University of Worcester Digital Arts CentreThe white I mac computers in the Digital Arts Centre at the UniversityView through the window into the MA Creative Digital Media computer room

  • 1

Where could it take you?

If you are a media practitioner, you can find employment in design, film, television or photography studios. If your field is in fine art, you could find employment in galleries, curation or public and private commissions. Many of our graduates proceed to freelance careers. Others find vocation as teachers and lecturers.

We have designed this exciting course such that you may participate in any area that represents your practice. You might be a designer, filmmaker, illustrator, painter, photographer, printmaker, animator or practicing in any other creative field. One of the distinct aspects of our programme is that you will be working and studying alongside graduates in a range of disciplines: this is an unusual, and very stimulating, inspiring factor of the course. You will benefit from contribution and support from student colleagues from diverse disciplines that will broaden your outlook and vision.

Graduates of the current programme have been successfully placed in studios specialising in design, video editing, film production and photography. Many are now pursuing freelance practice. To cite just a few achievements, the following are representative:

  • Specialising in printmaking, the graduate was commissioned in 2015 for the design on the ten metre high banners for the east end of Worcester Cathedral during the east window restoration: his woodcut designs won high acclaim.
  • The graduate presented his feature film - produced as a course assignment - at the H.P. Lovecraft Film Festival in Los Angeles in 2015.
  • Having been previously a filmmaker, the graduate is currently extending his course research on web screen technology as part of a funded project in his native South Korea.
  • Based on her feature-length documentary for her dissertation, the graduate is working as a director in the film industry in her native Romania.
  • The graduate is now a television producer in his native India.
  • A specialist in journalism who took our course as a storyteller, the graduate is a creative production writer and concept developer in her native Nigeria.
  • The graduate has been commissioned by publishers to illustrate children's books: these include The Leopard Boy, written by Julia Johnson, and published by Frances Lincoln.
  • Three recent graduates of the current course are now lecturing at higher education level.
Forensic Psychology

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,599.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Forensic Psychology MSc at Worcester special?*

This postgraduate qualification will give you the opportunity to understand how psychology is applied within forensic settings and will place you in a great position to pursue a career within the legal/criminal justice systems. The course focuses on the key themes, theory and practical skills that are relevant to understanding criminal behaviour and working with forensic clients at different stages of the criminal justice process.

The course is delivered by a team of academics who have experience of working within forensic settings and/or conducting applied research from a forensic psychological perspective. Expert visiting lecturers, meanwhile, will ensure you are provided with an insight from those who are currently working as practitioners and enable you to make links between theory, research and practice. 

*This course is launching in September 2020.

Overview

Key features

  • Develop the knowledge and skills needed for a variety of forensic roles/career pathways

  • Learn about work carried out by Forensic Psychologists within applied settings and about different psychological approaches to current issues in forensic psychology

  • Undertake independent empirical investigations in the field of forensic psychology
  • There is a strong emphasis on the development of theory, research and practice links. Ensuring your practice is underpinned by effective theoretical and research foundations, whilst also being responsive to current and contemporary developments in the field of forensic psychology

How will you be taught?

All modules are delivered via a supportive learning environment with 2-day block sessions occurring twice per semester. 

You are taught through a combination of on-campus lectures and self-directed study tasks, including the use of our virtual learning environment. Lectures are typically held on a Friday and Saturday, and the dates will depend on the module being delivered. The block teaching days involve engaging with different learning activities, such as lectures, practical tasks (individual and/or group), discussion and reflection.

In addition, meetings with your allocated personal academic tutor and your research supervisor are scheduled when required and in line with the module handbook.

Teaching

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have approximately 10-12 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the module being delivered. Sessions will typically be delivered between 9am and 5pm with scheduled breaks throughout the day.

Typically, class contact time will be structured around:

  • Sessions on a Friday and Saturday. Each 15-credit module has 12 content sessions that will be delivered as a combination of didactic lectures and self-directed study tasks that link with the assignments for each module. A typical day will involve 3-4 lectures/activity driven sessions. The module specification for each module outlines the taught and self-directed elements of each and is available for students on Blackboard.

Independent self study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake personal self-study. Typically, this will involve further reading on each module and additional reading and research to complete each module’s assessments. Students are expected to be completing approximately 22 hours of directed online and independent study per week in addition to the 16 hours of taught content provided within the daily block teaching sessions.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.  There are also additional reading and resources on the module’s Blackboard site, which will be made available to you once you register for the module.

Duration

  • Part-time: 2-6 years
  • Full-time: 1 year

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings. Teaching is currently scheduled for Fridays and Saturdays (subject to confirmation).

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments.  Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments, which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment methods include essays, examinations, individual presentations, portfolios, literature reviews, reflective workbooks and research analysis exercises.

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal coursework assessments within 20 working days of the hand-in date.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and practitioners with professional experience within the field of forensic psychology.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and all substantive course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Teaching staff include Dr Amy GrubbDr Gillian Harrop and Dr Holly Taylor-Dunn.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

The structure and content of the programme allows you to gain skills that are valued by employers. The course will provide you with various transferable skills that equip you for employment in a variety of forensic allied roles/criminal justice professions. Exemplar graduate roles include probation officer, assistant forensic/clinical psychologist, offender behaviour programme treatment facilitator, research assistant/fellow, police officer, prison officer, police crime/intelligence analyst, crime scene analyst, drug support worker, lecturer in psychology, etc.

Human Resource Management

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Human Resource Management MSc at Worcester special?

With an optional 6-month internship, accreditation from the prestigious Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and membership/additional qualifications from the Chartered Management Institute*, this one-year full-time, specialist programme is designed to inspire you to lead and develop others, through effective management of resourcing, talent and change.

The CIPD is the professional body for HR and people development. Successful completion of this MSc is comparable to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Diploma standards - this is the highest level of qualification offered by CIPD. Completion of the course also entitle graduates to Associate Membership of CIPD, which, with HR work experience at the required level, can be upgraded to Chartered Membership.

This is a highly contemporary course, which brings you right up to date with latest emerging contexts, such as global shifts in economic power, climate change, employer branding, changing work patterns, and how to build an inclusive organisation that is rooted in both global diversity, best practices and intercultural competence. Your time at university is an important investment in your future career potential and ability to compete for the most desirable graduate jobs.

The employment prospects for Worcester graduates are excellent - 93% of our students are in work or further study within six months of graduation and we will work with you throughout your studies to prepare you for your future career.

*subject to payment of dual accreditation fee

Overview

Key features

  • Accredited by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)
  • Optional 6-month internship
  • Certificate in Strategic Management (CMI qualification) optionally awarded* upon successful completion of the course which will greatly impact your long-term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute (CMI)
  • A multinational programme, typically attracting students from over 20 countries, enabling you to share your experience and build a global mindset

*subject to payment of dual accreditation fee

CIPD-CMI-logos

Accredited by the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD).

Certificate in Strategic Management (a Chartered Management Institute qualification) optionally awarded upon successful completion of the programme, which will greatly impact your long term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the CMI.

How will you be taught?

Teaching approach

Typically lectures in Worcester Business School are two or three hours long. During this time, you will experience a range of learning activities intended to stimulate you and enable you to learn effectively.

Lectures usually begin with a classroom lesson that lasts around 45 minutes, introducing the underpinning concepts of a topic. You will be expected to participate here - by offering your opinion, by using an Electronic Voting System or by interrupting when you wish to challenge what the lecturer is suggesting.

After the introductory lecture you will often be split into small seminar groups during which you will work individually or with two or three other students on case studies which will enable you to explore the subject in greater depth. We believe that collaborative learning with your fellow students is very important.

Between lectures you will carry out further study - we adopt an 'open door' policy and you will be encouraged to seek the help of lecturers. Most class materials will be uploaded to Blackboard (our VLE) before sessions and these materials can be downloaded at University or from anywhere with an internet connection. Many modules have set up on-line discussion facilities to enable you to collaborate with other students between sessions.

Assessment

Assessments will involve both written coursework assignments and examinations in the key areas of management. The Masters award will require students to complete a supervised 10,000 word Dissertation.

A wide variety of assessment methods are used, including case studies, research projects, reports, presentations, business simulations and examinations.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Our postgraduate programmes are delivered by a diverse range of faculty. Our programme tutors are experts both in their subject matter and in the delivery of this in innovative and powerful ways.

Where could it take you?

The MSc Human Resource Management prepares you for a successful career in areas such as personnel management, consultancy, recruitment and selection, training and development, reward management and human resource planning.

You may also wish to further your studies by undertaking a PhD in HRM related issues, under the supervision of our Centre for People @ Work.

Internship

Subject to permission by UK Visa and Immigration on application of your visa you can choose to take a 6 month internship, extending the 12 month Masters course to 18 months. Whilst an internship of your choice is not guaranteed the Business School will support you to be successful in finding a suitable internship to gain important experience within the UK workforce.

Students choosing to undertake the optional internship will have access to a placements preparation module and careers advice and support, which will assist you in preparation for interviews, CV writing, understanding assessment centres etc. Thereafter, you will be able to apply to spend your internship at an organisation of your choice, anywhere in the UK or abroad (once confirmed with the Placements Office). Students have taken internships in DHL, Daimler, Borwell, Herefordshire & Worcestershire Fire and Rescue Service, ISOQS, Sight Concern, Southco, St Richards Hospice, and Worcestershire County Cricket Club.

WBS also have links with national companies through placement programmes such as Aldi, Asda, Atos, Bosch, CGI, Eaton, Eli Lilly, Enterprise Rent A Car, Hewlett Packard, IBM, Intel, Jaguar Land Rover, Lenova, Lidl, Marks & Spencer, Mercedes, Microsoft, Napp, Porsche, Volkswagen, Volvo and Waitrose.

 

Transferable skills

Alongside your academic development, you will be able to develop your key transferable skills, including:

  • Project management and problem solving skills
  • Planning, analysis, organisation and implementation skills
  • Teamwork, leadership and personal efficiency
  • Communication skills
  • Practical experience of relevant commercial software
  • Development of innovation, creativity and entrepreneurship
Healthcare Management and Leadership

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes Healthcare Management and Leadership MSc at the University of Worcester special?

The MSc Healthcare Management and Leadership programme provides an opportunity to develop knowledge and skills in relation to effectively managing and leading people, processes and practices within healthcare settings. Management and leadership in the health and social care sector is increasingly important both in the UK and worldwide, with the NHS promoting specific values and principles of care (Department of Health, 2010) and the World Health Organisation highlighting the need for managers and leaders to have appropriate skills and knowledge (WHO, 2007) 

Designed specifically for existing and aspiring managers and leaders, through completion of this programme, students will develop skills to critically debate the challenges facing healthcare leaders, and the roles that clinicians, managers and the wider healthcare economy can play in reshaping healthcare services. It will also enable managers and leaders.to apply their learning to their workplace environment through practical and applied leadership case studies, debates and challenges.

It is a distinct programme in that it offers learning opportunities delivered by experts from Worcester Business School and healthcare staff from Schools across Health, Life and Environmental Sciences bringing together key theories of leadership and management with the specific relevance to health systems and social care.

This programme provides a developmental route for health care professionals who work at advanced level practice as managers and leaders within healthcare. It addresses the important factors influencing the management and leadership of both organisations and individuals. It aims to equip students with the knowledge, skills and resources to enable them to reach their full potential as managers and leaders. A flexible, multidisciplinary approach postgraduate achievement within a supportive environment enables students to learn with and from each other to develop professional networks, in addition to advancing their own practice.

Overview

Key features

  • An environment in which students gain the confidence to meet current and shape future health and social care provision.
  • Modules which develop critical reflection, originality, critique and synthesis to advance decision making skills in complex healthcare settings.
  • Opportunities for the student to challenge their own values and attitudes and develop new ways of thinking in a supportive environment in relation to service design, implementation of change, patient safety and risk management.
  • Opportunities to examine contemporary policy, practice, leadership and management theories and how to apply them to real world situations.
  • Opportunities to explore the principles, approaches, strategies and techniques for analysing, designing and managing complex healthcare organisations.
  • Essential knowledge to manage the integration of people, systems and technologies that ensure the delivery of consistent high quality, person-centric care.
  • Opportunity to study alongside Worcester Business School students on several shared modules.
  • Opportunities for the student to develop career progression as managers and leaders within healthcare.

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

Teaching

You are taught through a blended learning approach, including a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and practical and on-line activities. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities.  Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, and workshops are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work. For full time students, teaching will be typically be scheduled on a day per week basis.

For full time students, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least four occasions and with your dissertation supervisor in the last semester.

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services, and also the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you to flourish and be successful.

Location of teaching

This course is delivered in the UK at the University of Worcester campuses by UW staff from the Three Counties School of Nursing and Midwifery and the Business School.

This will include blended learning combining face to face with online activities

Contact time

Full-time students can expect to have between 12 and 15 hours per week contact time during theory weeks.  Part time students can expect to have 6 hours contact time per week, however, precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected during each semester. The majority of modules are delivered during the day time however some are delivered on an evening basis for both full and part time students.

In the final semester when students will normally be undertaking the dissertation, they will have less classroom contact time in order to do more independent study. Individual supervision will be provided on a one to one basis of a total of 6 hours. 

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, full time students are expected to undertake around 24 hours of personal self-study per week.  Part time students are expected to undertake around 6 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Duration

  • 12 months full-time
  • 4-6 years part-time

Timetables

Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Teaching staff

Students will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes staff from both the Worcester Business School and Schools across Health, Life and Environmental Sciences on both sites.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy, and as at January 2018, 75% per cent of University of Worcester  course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

You can learn more about the staff by visiting our staff profiles within the School of Nursing and Midwifery and Worcester Business School

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments.  Each module, on both sites, has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessment which is graded and counts towards the overall module grade.  

Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, project plan, presentations and a dissertation

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern, for a full-time student on both sites, for each year of the course is:

Semester 1
1 research proposal
1 critique
1 personal development plan
1 reflective essay
2 essays

Semester 2
1 report-based case study
1 essay
1 individual or group presentation
1 peer assessment
1 reflective report

Semester 3
Dissertation

The precise assessment requirements for part time students will vary according to the modules selected.

All assignments will be marked, moderated and follow the same process and module assessment. They will all be presented at the same exam board regardless of the location of the course delivery

You will receive feedback on formative assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

You will receive feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.  

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Almost all students are already in employment therefore the focus is on introducing more effective ways of working within your Trusts and employing organisations. The programme equips you to develop in your existing roles, within your area of practice and to progress into strategic and leadership roles. As part of the journey of professional and role development we encourage students to continue on their academic journey through access to a range of higher degrees including PhD, clinical doctorate and other taught doctorates.

International Management

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes International Management MSc at Worcester special?

Offering up-to-the minute study of the very latest global trends and techniques in successful leadership and management, this one-year full-time programme includes an optional 6-month internship and membership/additional qualifications from the prestigious Chartered Management Institute*

A particular feature of this programme is the opportunity to specialise in a particular aspect of modern management to suit your interests and future career plans - e.g. finance, HRM or marketing.

Your time at university is an important investment in your future career potential and ability to compete for the most desirable graduate jobs. The employment prospects for Worcester graduates are excellent - 93% of our students are in work or further study within six months of graduation and we will work with you throughout your studies to prepare you for your future career.

*subject to payment of dual accreditation fee

Overview

Key features

  • No previous work experience required
  • Optional 6 month internship
  • Certificate in Strategic Management (CMI qualification) optionally awarded* upon successful completion of the course which will greatly impact your long term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute (CMI)
  • Free entry to our Enterprise Events allowing you to network with successful entrepreneurs and leading business academics

 *subject to payment of dual accreditation fee

Chartered Management Institute logo

Certificate in Strategic Management (a Chartered Management Institute qualification) optionally awarded upon successful completion of the programme, which will greatly impact your long term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the CMI.

How will you be taught?

Typically lectures in Worcester Business School are two or three hours long. During this time, you will experience a range of learning activities intended to stimulate you and enable you to learn effectively.

Lectures usually begin with a classroom lesson that lasts around 45 minutes, introducing the underpinning concepts of a topic. You will be expected to participate here - by offering your opinion, by using an Electronic Voting System or by interrupting when you wish to challenge what the lecturer is suggesting.

After the introductory lecture you will often be split into small seminar groups during which you will work individually or with two or three other students on case studies which will enable you to explore the subject in greater depth. We believe that collaborative learning with your fellow students is very important.

Between lectures you will carry out further study - we adopt an 'open door' policy and you will be encouraged to seek the help of lecturers. Most class materials will be uploaded to Blackboard (our VLE) before sessions and these materials can be downloaded at University or from anywhere with an internet connection. Many modules have set up on-line discussion facilities to enable you to collaborate with other students between sessions.

Assessments

Assessments will involve both written coursework assignments and examinations in the key areas of management. The Masters award will require students to complete a supervised 10,000 word Dissertation.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

Our postgraduate programmes are delivered by a diverse range of faculty. Our programme tutors are experts both in their subject matter and in the delivery of this in innovative and powerful ways.

Where could it take you?

Employability

The Management MSc develops your knowledge and understanding of business, and the analytical and management skills valued by employers in both the public and private sectors. It provides an ideal preparation for a wide range of business and management careers.

Internship

Subject to permission by UK Visa and Immigration on application of your visa you can choose to take a 6 month internship, extending the 12 month Masters course to 18 months. Whilst an internship of your choice is not guaranteed the Business School will support you to be successful in finding a suitable internship to gain important experience within the UK workforce.

If you choose to undertake the optional internship you will have access to a placements preparation module and careers advice and support, which will assist you in preparation for interviews, CV writing, understanding assessment centres etc. Thereafter, you will be able to apply to spend your internship at an organisation of your choice, anywhere in the UK or abroad (once confirmed with the Placements Office). Students have taken internships in DHL, Daimler, Borwell, Herefordshire & Worcestershire Fire and Rescue Service, ISOQS, Sight Concern, Southco, St Richards Hospice, and Worcestershire County Cricket Club.

We also have links with national companies through placement programmes such as Aldi, Asda, Atos, Bosch, CGI, Eaton, Eli Lilly, Enterprise Rent A Car, Hewlett Packard, IBM, Intel, Jaguar Land Rover, Lenova, Lidl, Marks & Spencer, Mercedes, Microsoft, Napp, Porsche, Volkswagen, Volvo and Waitrose.

International Sport Management

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes MSc International Sport Management at Worcester special?

The course is aimed at graduates aspiring to work in sports business or management positions in the world’s most exciting industry, and professionals working in sport organisations who want to expand their management skills and knowledge to improve their career prospects.

This is an exciting programme putting you at the heart of the learning experience. You will challenge and critique current issues and debates of leadership, sponsorship, global events and the governance of sport. You will blend academic scholarship and applied practice through engagement with guest speakers and sports organisations with an international profile.

Overview

Key features

  • Future-focused through applied sports business practices
  • Student-driven assessments
  • International field visit (Tampa, Florida in 2017 & 2018)
  • Networking opportunities via guest speakers and The Future of Sport Conference

 

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.

A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

The teaching strategy is eclectic enabling you to gain the necessary underpinning theoretical knowledge and research that will allow active exploration, reflection and critical evaluation of own perceptions and knowledge. This approach develops your ability to be an autonomous and self-directed learner with the confidence to manage your own learning.

Action learning involves the use of ‘real-life’ problems and scenarios; these are integrated into the workshops and other face-to-face sessions. Guest speaker input, visits to sports organisations and an international field visit add depth and ‘real’ world insights to enable the contextual understanding and critical perspectives presented throughout the programme.

Contact time

For intensive study weeks students are expected to have 5 x 8 hours of contact time per intensive week (2 in total). In addition, students are expected to have approximately 3 hours of further contact time per module, per week.

In addition, students attend two complete study days (16 hours) prior to their period of professional practice, and are able to access 8 hours of tutorial support during the course of their dissertation study. Students will also receive two days of structured dissertation preparation.

Independent self study

In addition to the contact time, students are expected to undertake around 2 hours of personal self-study per module per week. Typically, this will involve online study tasks, reading journal articles and completing formative assignments. The Dissertation requires substantial independent work and can be expected to require 600 hours of study. In addition students are required to undertake 100 hours of placement activities as part of their Professional Placement.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. 

Duration

  • 1 year full time
  • 2-6 years part time

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings. Given the importance of planning ahead, indicative timings of intensive teaching blocks are normally available at time of application / interview.

Teaching staff

Students will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course and have experience of both research and applied practice and consultancy; the team includes a range of expert lectures (details of which can be found on the course handbook and on the Institute web pages).

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments. 

Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.  Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, performance, presentations and a final dissertation. The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the course selected.

Programme Specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

dr-paul-blakey

Dr Paul Blakey

Paul is Senior Lecturer in Sport Business Management and joined the School of Sport and Exercise Science in 2015. Paul has considerable experience within the higher education sector having previously been course leader for Sport MSc programmes at Northumbria University, and before that at the University of Chester. His PhD thesis, from the University of Manchester, focused upon strategic marketing practices of small and medium-sized businesses in the leisure industry. Prior to embarking on a career in academia, Paul was employed by several sport, leisure and hospitality companies, most notably working as an Assistant Manager with a leading private sector entertainment company.

Paul has worked on collaborative, and individual, research publications, conference presentations, in-field event impact studies for sport governing bodies and co-ordinated a nationwide research project for a UK-based leisure corporation. He has supervised PhD students on subjects including surf brands, sports volunteers and sport tourism destinations.

  • 1

Where could it take you?

The School of Sport and Exercise Science (SSES) approach to developing employability is aligned to the University ‘Student Employability Supporting Statement for the Learning, Teaching and Assessment Strategy’. The University of Worcester has adopted the following definition of employability as: “A set of achievements – skills, understandings and personal attributes – that makes graduates more likely to gain employment and be successful in their chosen occupation, which benefits themselves, the workforce, the community and the economy”, (Yorke, 2006)

Sports graduates have gone on to gain employment in the following areas: Sport Community coaching (including disability coaching career opportunities); Sport scientist; Strength and conditioning coach; clinical exercise physiologist; Sport performance coaching; Sports Marketing; Sport Events; Professional Sports Clubs; National and International Sport Governing Bodies; Sport Community Coaching (including disability coaching career opportunities); Sport Development Officers; Coaching business start-up; Graduate level employment in the Private, public and voluntary sectors.

Journalism

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $16,389.
  • Duration 3 Years.

What makes Journalism at Worcester special?

From front-page scoops to stories on Twitter, Worcester journalism graduates are equipped with the multimedia experience to build a career in newspapers, magazines, TV, radio or online. Recognition has come through the high number of journalism awards won by students, including innovative magazine productions and the impressive employment rates.

You'll study the full range of modern media, developing a broad portfolio of professional skills before focusing on your preferred medium. The course stays up-to-date with mobile journalism, data journalism and the use of drones.

Overview

Key features

  • Accredited by the Broadcast Journalism Training Council; an elite, widely-recognised Kitemark
  • Our strong links with industry, including a BBC Media Diversity Partnership, create excellent placement opportunities and progression into work

  • Attend live news days and study in two new radio studios linked to a newsroom and digitally equipped TV studio

  • Develop specialisms in areas such as sports or political journalism, photography, social media management or PR
  • Excellent graduate employment rates

THE Awards 2019 - Shortlisted - University of the Year

Shortlisted for University of the Year

The University of Worcester has been shortlisted in six categories of the prestigious Times Higher Education Awards 2019, including University of the Year.

READ THE FULL STORY

How will you be taught?

bjtc-logo

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement. A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

Teaching

You are taught through a combination of:

  • Lectures; seminars; demonstrations; workshops; work simulations (newsdays); tutorials, group and individual project work; supervised independent learning; open and resource-based learning; e-learning; production practice and work experience and placements.
  • Teaching involves large and small group sessions, the latter especially for workshop activities related to the acquisition of production skills.
  • Sessions are a mix of tutor-led, student-led and independent learning. 
  • You will investigate critically and analyse theoretical and conceptual issues central to journalism studies and be able to synthesis and evaluate material. Acquire skills to'originate and develop ideas for editorial content across a range of platforms. Investigate the development of journalism with regard to political, social, economic, legal, ethical and technological considerations.

In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 4 occasions in the first year and three occasions in each of the other years of a course, including during an induction session at the start of each academic year.

You have an opportunity to undertake work placements in both your second and third years of the course, as part of mandatory modules on the course.

You use industry-standard equipment and software for all pathways and have access to state-of-the-art TV and radio studios throughout the course.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 15-16 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the optional modules selected and in the final year you will normally have slightly less contact time in order to do more independent study.

Typically class contact time will be structured around:

  • 6 hours of interactive workshops
  • 3 hours of lectures with discussion
  • 6 hours of supervised practical sessions, including newsdays 

In addition, there will be individual or small group tutorial sessions.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 22 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve completing practical activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations, and preparing for examinations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.

Assessment is largely coursework. Assessment methods include: written news stories, features and commentaries; audio and visual news and feature inserts; newsdays; portfolios with reflective log books; production tasks involving a range of media technology; group and individually produced projects; research exercises; critical self and peer review; work-based learning reports and external placement opportunities. There are two examinations in the Law and Ethics modules in years one and two.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the mandatory and optional modules taken, but a typical formal summative assessment pattern for each year of the course is:

Year 1
6 practical journalistic pieces / portfolios and learning reports
1 formal examination of 1hour duration
2 essays
1 individual or group presentations

Year 2
6 practical journalistic pieces / portfolios and learning reports
1 formal examination of 1 hour duration
1 reflective and skills portfolio relating to work placement
2 essays
1 newsday assessment

Year 3
Major independent final project, which is a journalistic production of your choice
3 practical journalistic pieces / portfolios 
3 essays 
1 reflective and skills portfolio relating to work placement
2 newsday assessments

Feedback

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification.

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. Every member of the team has a wealth of industry experience, including academics with specialist areas and those who combine teaching with professional practice. There are also demonstrators and technical officers.

Teaching is informed by research and consultancy and all permanent staff on the team are Fellows of HEA and have the post grad teaching qualification. 

rachel-ammonds

Rachel Ammonds

Rachel Ammonds teaches a wide range of undergraduate modules and is Course Leader for Journalism.

She is an experienced broadcast journalist whose career began at BBC radio in the Midlands. She moved to the BBC in Manchester, working within radio and television, and was part of the team that won a Sony Award for coverage of the IRA bombing of Manchester. Rachel moved to ITV in 1997, producing the North Wests regional news programme. She then helped set up ITVs health channel before moving into making documentaries for ITV, focusing mainly on its flagship current affairs programme, Tonight with Trevor McDonald, for which she worked as a producer/director.

claire-wolfe

Claire Wolfe

Claire Wolfe is Principal Lecturer in Journalism at Worcester and has a strong background in news journalism. She is particularly interested in developing students’ skills and abilities to work across a range of media platforms.  

Her twenty-five years in journalism include working at the Sunday Mirror and Central News, and editing business magazines. She has been associated with journalism training throughout her career, much of it related to the NCTJ.

rachel-ammonds

Rachel Ammonds

Rachel Ammonds teaches a wide range of undergraduate modules and is Course Leader for Journalism.

She is an experienced broadcast journalist whose career began at BBC radio in the Midlands. She moved to the BBC in Manchester, working within radio and television, and was part of the team that won a Sony Award for coverage of the IRA bombing of Manchester. Rachel moved to ITV in 1997, producing the North Wests regional news programme. She then helped set up ITVs health channel before moving into making documentaries for ITV, focusing mainly on its flagship current affairs programme, Tonight with Trevor McDonald, for which she worked as a producer/director.

claire-wolfe

Claire Wolfe

Claire Wolfe is Principal Lecturer in Journalism at Worcester and has a strong background in news journalism. She is particularly interested in developing students’ skills and abilities to work across a range of media platforms.  

Her twenty-five years in journalism include working at the Sunday Mirror and Central News, and editing business magazines. She has been associated with journalism training throughout her career, much of it related to the NCTJ.

rachel-ammonds

Rachel Ammonds

Rachel Ammonds teaches a wide range of undergraduate modules and is Course Leader for Journalism.

She is an experienced broadcast journalist whose career began at BBC radio in the Midlands. She moved to the BBC in Manchester, working within radio and television, and was part of the team that won a Sony Award for coverage of the IRA bombing of Manchester. Rachel moved to ITV in 1997, producing the North Wests regional news programme. She then helped set up ITVs health channel before moving into making documentaries for ITV, focusing mainly on its flagship current affairs programme, Tonight with Trevor McDonald, for which she worked as a producer/director.

PreviousNext

  • 1
  • 2

Where could it take you?

Employability

The University of Worcester Journalism course will provide you with practical skills to work as a journalist or researcher, or in related communications jobs such as those in public relations. You will be well placed to progress to postgraduate study in journalism or in a wide range of other areas.

Students have found employment in the following areas:

  • Radio presenting and reporting
  • Magazine and newspaper journalism
  • Social media management
  • Public relations and communications
  • Media research
  • Sports journalism
  • Event organising
  • Television
  • Marketing
  • Teaching
  • Further study

Skills gained:

  • Print, broadcasting and web content creation
  • Digital communications
  • Team working
  • Working independently
  • Communicating with others
  • Writing effectively
  • Clear and logical thinking
  • Finding information
  • Evaluating ideas
  • Showing initiative
  • Advance planning and working to deadlines
Masters of Business Administration

A Masters Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes an MBA at Worcester special?

The Worcester MBA is an internationally-recognised postgraduate qualification in management, which will challenge you to stretch your natural abilities. This one-year full-time programme focuses on the very latest management techniques and includes an optional 6-month internship and membership/additional qualifications from the prestigious Chartered Management Institute*

The MBA enables students with no direct prior management experience to be exposed to some of the challenges and tensions that exist within the management levels of the contemporary organisation. The broad curriculum allows students to collectively consider issues facing business today, analysing business and organisational problems, developing the ability to recognise and exploit opportunities, and to act in a decisive and entrepreneurial way to gain Advantage.

Your time at university is an important investment in your future career potential and ability to compete for the most desirable graduate jobs. The employment prospects for Worcester graduates are excellent - 93% of our students are in work or further study within six months of graduation and we will work with you throughout your studies to prepare you for your future career.

*subject to payment of dual accreditation fee

Overview

Key features

  • No previous work experience required
  • Optional 6-month internship
  • Certificate in Strategic Management (CMI qualification) optionally awarded* upon successful completion of the course which will greatly impact your long-term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the Chartered Management Institute (CMI)
  • Free entry to our Worcester Enterprise events allowing you to network with successful entrepreneurs and leading business academics.
  • A multinational programme, typically attracting students from over 20 countries, enabling you to share your experience and build a global mindset.

Chartered Management Institute logo

 

Certificate in Strategic Management (a Chartered Management Institute qualification) optionally awarded upon successful completion of the programme, which will greatly impact your long term career aspirations. You will also have access to Associate Membership of the CMI.

Stanley Ocitti

Stanley Ocitti

“Attending the University of Worcester helped give me the tools I needed to start my own business with confidence and a clear understanding of how small businesses operate in a global environment.

"The benefits of attending the University go beyond the classroom. I was able to connect with a diverse community of people from various backgrounds, travel within the UK and gain an understanding of the culture and people.

"Courses are fun and challenging and teachers are engaging and available outside of classroom hours. I would definitely recommend the University of Worcester to any student.”

What will you study?

Our courses are informed by research and current developments in the discipline and feedback from students, external examiners and employers. Modules do therefore change periodically in the interests of keeping the course relevant and reflecting best practice. The most up-to-date information will be available to you once you have accepted a place and registered for the course. If there are insufficient numbers of students interested in an optional module, this might not be offered, but we will advise you as soon as possible and help you choose an alternative. 

Modules

  • Business Investigation & Discovery
  • Financial Decision Making for Managers
  • Innovation, Entrepreneurship & Delivering Change
  • International Operations' Management
  • Strategic Marketing in the Digital Economy
  • Strategic Resourcing and Talent Management
  • Strategy, Sustainability & the Global Economy
  • Research Methods

Project alternatives

  • Management Project (based upon 'client' brief)
    or
    Dissertation

Skills you will gain

  • learn to develop sustainable strategies which can work within a hypercompetitive environment in both the physical place and the virtual space.
  • consider how to recruit the very best employees, through techniques such as creating an effective brand as an employer, innovative job design and analysis of key metrics.
  • explore international operations management in terms of managing the global supply chain, outsourcing and cross-functional team working.
  • hone your financial decision-making skills enabling you to demonstrate your ability to optimise shareholder value, even in complex circumstances such as mergers and hostile takeover.

Enterprise Events

As an MBA student you will have the chance to meet and network with expert entrepreneurs and business academics at our enterprise events which take place in the Business Incubation unit at Worcester Business School.

You can look forward to external events such as:

  • Malvern Festival of Innovation
  • A visit to West Midlands Innovation Centre
  • Social Enterprise West Midlands networking events
  • Hereford and Worcester Chamber of Commerce Business Expo
  • Grow with Confidence Small Business Forum

How will you be taught?

Teaching approach

Typically lectures in Worcester Business School are two or three hours long. During this time, you will experience a range of learning activities intended to stimulate you and enable you to learn effectively.

Lectures usually begin with a classroom lesson that lasts around 45 minutes, introducing the underpinning concepts of a topic. You will be expected to participate here - by offering your opinion, by using an Electronic Voting System or by interrupting when you wish to challenge what the lecturer is suggesting.

After the introductory lecture you will often be split into small seminar groups during which you will work individually or with two or three other students on case studies which will enable you to explore the subject in greater depth. We believe that collaborative learning with your fellow students is very important.

Between lectures you will carry out further study - we adopt an 'open door' policy and you will be encouraged to seek the help of lecturers. Most class materials will be uploaded to Blackboard (our VLE) before sessions and these materials can be downloaded at University or from anywhere with an internet connection. Many modules have set up on-line discussion facilities to enable you to collaborate with other students between sessions.

"I really appreciate the most excellent support provided to me throughout my MBA journey."

Walid Abou El-Dahab, UAE, MBA

Our postgraduate programmes are delivered by a diverse range of faculty. Our programme tutors are experts both in their subject matter and in the delivery of this in innovative and powerful ways.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

Employability

Your understanding of financial management, gained through the MBA, will allow you to operate effectively and efficiently in many different business roles. Possible career options include corporate financial management, accountancy, investment management and consultancy.

Internship

Subject to permission by the UK borders Agency on application of your visa you can choose to take a 6 month internship, extending the 12 month Masters course to 18 months. Whilst an internship of your choice is not guaranteed the Business School will support you to be successful in finding a suitable internship to gain important experience within the UK workforce.

Students choosing to undertake the optional internship will have access to a placements preparation module and careers advice and support, which will assist you in preparation for interviews, CV writing, understanding assessment centres etc. Thereafter, you will be able to apply to spend your internship at an organisation of your choice, anywhere in the UK or abroad (once confirmed with the Placements Office). Students have taken internships in DHL, Daimler, Borwell, Herefordshire & Worcestershire Fire and Rescue Service, ISOQS, Sight Concern, Southco, St Richards Hospice, and Worcestershire County Cricket Club.

WBS also have links with national companies through placement programmes such as Aldi, Asda, Atos, Bosch, CGI, Eaton, Eli Lilly, Enterprise Rent A Car, Hewlett Packard, IBM, Intel, Jaguar Land Rover, Lenova, Lidl, Marks & Spencer, Mercedes, Microsoft, Napp, Porsche, Volkswagen, Volvo and Waitrose.

 

Atmospheric Sciences

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,502.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Atmospheric Science.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

The Atmospheric Science team at Worcester runs a range of experiments funded by UK research councils that are well suited for additional PhD studies in relation to vegetation and/or atmospheric science. It is affiliated within European funded exchange programmes providing extensive possibilities for travelling and longer-term visits at international partner universities.

Overview

Key features

  • Available as a full-time or part-time course (completed over a maximum of six years).

  • Links with European funded exchange programmes and experiments funded by UK research councils.

  • All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme, focused around a wide range of themes.

  • Access an excellent range of resources and equipment, including meteorological observational equipment, a drone with meteorological sensors, pollen and spore traps and modelling facilities.

  • Our staff have a broad range of expertise in aerobiology, palynology, meteorology, climate, GIS, modelling, field studies, and air pollution.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Supervision areas

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in aerobiology, palynology, meteorology, climate, GIS, modelling, field studies, and air pollution.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state-of-the-art library facilities. The Atmospheric Science team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project, including: meteorological observational equipment, a drone with meteorological sensors, pollen and spore traps, a high-performance computing facility for modelling such as weather forecasting. The team also runs a range of experiments funded by UK research councils that are well suited for additional PhD studies in relation to vegetation and/or atmospheric science. It is affiliated within European funded exchange programmes providing extensive possibilities for travelling and longer-term visits at international partner universities.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Dr Carsten Skjøth 
Expertise: aerobiology, meteorology, climate, GIS, modelling, field studies, air quality, remote sensing and satellites, atmosphere-vegetation studies.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree.

At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional.At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies.

This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year.

All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Computing

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,621.
  • Duration 4 Years.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The Worcester Business School has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in a range of computing areas but are particularly interested in supporting topics in the following more specific areas: computer games, e-business, social media, and technology-driven behaviour change.

Current MPhil/PhD research projects in Computing include developing a method for accounting for the presence of sarcasm in sentiment analysis.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities. A dedicated research student office in the Business School and membership, as appropriate, of our Customer Interactions Group, Entrepreneurship Research Group and Managing Operations, Risk and Sustainability Group.

Current MPhil/PhD research projects in Computing include: research and development in the field of suitability of educational video games for both students and educators.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional.

At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year.

All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Criminology

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,615.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Criminology.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

Overview

School of Psychology

The School of Psychology has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in intimate partner violence, risk assessment, policing and crime reduction.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The School of Psychology has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in intimate partner violence, risk assessment, policing and crime reduction.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state-of-the-art library facilities. The Criminology team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project, including links to a range of agencies within the justice sector and aligned services across Herefordshire, Worcestershire, Shropshire, Telford & Wrekin, Gloucestershire, West Midlands and Warwickshire. A database designed to identify sector research requirements is currently in development.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Dr Rosie Erol 
Research specialisms: policing, crime reduction, violent crime, domestic abuse, vulnerability, health-related evaluations. 
Research methodologies: qualitative methods, mixed and multi-methods.

Professor Elizabeth Gilchrist 
Research specialisms: domestic abuse/intimate partner violence and factors associated with IPV; risk assessment - particularly with intimate partner violence; innovative interventions for intimate partner violence - again particularly with perpetrators; victim/survivors perspectives on intimate partner violence; sports interventions and desistance; international perspectives on risk, interventions and offending.

Dr Gillian Harrop 
Research specialisms: violence and sexual violence; false allegations; domestic abuse; police investigation.

Dr Holly Taylor-Dunn 
Research specialisms: policing; domestic and sexual violence; stalking and harassment. 
Research methodologies: realistic evaluation, thematic analysis.

Self-funded project: Bystander Intervention

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional. At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Drama and Performance

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,615.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Drama and Performance.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in recent years. We aim to produce research that is distinctive, socially and culturally relevant, and that influences national agendas. We continually strive to develop new areas of research excellence while, in certain areas, our work has already been acknowledged as world-leading.

Overview

School of Arts

Our School of Arts has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in Shakespeare in performance, British theatre history and regional British theatre, Black British and British Asian theatre and audiences together with a range of contemporary performance practices including writing for performance, sexuality in performance, theatre and digital media, autobiographical performance, site-specific performance and applied theatre. There is a particular interest in Practice as Research in contemporary performance. 

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

Our School of Arts has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in Shakespeare in performance, British theatre history and regional British theatre, Black British and British Asian theatre and audiences together with a range of contemporary performance practices including writing for performance, sexuality in performance, theatre and digital media, autobiographical performance, site-specific performance and applied theatre. There is a particular interest in Practice as Research in contemporary performance.

A current PhD research project in Drama focuses on the ethics of the representation of living people in contemporary playwriting.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities. The Drama and Performance team at Worcester also have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project which includes a purpose built drama studio with rig seating for more than 100 people, green room, dressing room, costumes and properties stores, production equipment and an in-house studio technician.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Professor Claire Cochrane 
Expertise: 20th Century British theatre history; regional theatre; Black British and British Asian Theatre; Shakespeare in performance.

Dr Jane George 
Expertise: site specific performance; devising and physical theatre.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional.At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Ecology

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,615.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Ecology.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

Overview

School of Science and the Environment

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme.

Current research projects include enhancing pollination and pest regulation services in apple orchards by supplementing floral resources.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities. The Environmental Studies/Science team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Dr John Dutton 
Expertise: species conservation ecology and habitat management; species reintroductions and translocations; small mammal ecology and conservation; ex-situ species management; recreational management.

Dr Duncan Westbury 
Expertise: Ecological intensification for sustainable food production; Delivery of ecosystem services (pollination & pest regulation); Habitat creation, restoration and maintenance; plant community ecology and vegetation dynamics.

Dr Mike Wheeler 
Expertise: the population biology of colonising and invasive species; molecular ecology.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional. At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Education

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,615.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in a range of areas of Education.

Research in Education at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic and engaged research student body in Education. 

Overview

School of Education

The School of Education has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in, amongst other things, learning and teaching in different contexts; values education; professional learning and professional development; history of education; religious education; and special and inclusive education.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The School of Education has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in, amongst other things, learning and teaching in different contexts; values education; professional learning and professional development; history of education; religious education; and special and inclusive education.

Recent successful projects have involved research on a non-authoritarian approach to secondary school pedagogy; enhancing trainee teachers’ confidence and subject knowledge of primary school drama; and Kenyan teachers’ professional identity in the context of educational change. Some of the topic currently being explored by research students are: broadcast collective worship for schools at the BBC; leadership work in further education; and how the educational experiences of Muslim young women affect their life choices. In contrast, our newest Education MPhil/PhD student is evaluating SENCo perceptions of education, health and care plans.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

 

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional. At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Environmental Studies/Science

A Phd Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,599.
  • Duration 4 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Environmental Sciences/Studies.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

Overview

School of Science and the Environment

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third or fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme.

Current research projects include enhancing pollination and pest regulation services in apple orchards by supplementing floral resources.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state of the art library facilities. The Environmental Studies/Science team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Dr John Dutton 
Expertise: species conservation ecology and habitat management; species reintroductions and translocations; small mammal ecology and conservation; ex-situ species management; recreational management.

Dr Duncan Westbury 
Expertise:Ecological intensification for sustainable food production; Delivery of ecosystem services (pollination & pest regulation); Habitat creation, restoration and maintenance; plant community ecology and vegetation dynamics.

Dr Mike Wheeler 
Expertise: the population biology of colonising and invasive species; molecular ecology.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional. At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Design

A MPhil/MRes Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,615.
  • Duration 2 Years.

What makes the MRes in Design at Worcester special?

This MRes is a unique opportunity to work with national and international experts in Design while, at the same time, developing yourself as an expert in the field.

One of very few such courses in the UK, the MRes will enable you to acquire fundamental research skills while carrying out a major research project of your choice.

The MRes offers an ideal bridge to further postgraduate study (e.g. a PhD) or to acquire, transferrable employer-related skills in areas such as project planning and management, time management, research and data analysis, digital literacy and report writing.

Overview

Key features

  • A bridge from undergraduate to postgraduate study
  • Develop advanced research skills (e.g. in areas such as literature review and research methods)
  • Work with national and international experts in your field
  • Develop your practice and/or carry out a major research project in a topic of your choice
  • Acquire project management skills including: independent working; being able to devise, research, and execute a substantial research project; the ability to set goals, priorities and schedules; and to develop data analysis skills such as using electronic and online resources.

How will you be supervised?

You will be taught via a combination of classroom modules and supervisor-supported independent study. Lectures are used to impart the core knowledge essential to each component of the course, while also, generally, being interactive. Analysis, problem solving skills, and, most importantly, the application of knowledge to your own project are all developed through interactive seminars and workshops. On RTP405 and MHCA4001, both lectures and workshops are delivered principally via guest sessions in which the varied expertise of teaching staff across arts, humanities and the University as a whole will support the development of the broad, rounded skills that the MRes is designed to develop. Research skills are developed through classroom activities and assessments (as described above) but also in conjunction with supervisors on the supervisor-led modules MHCA4002 and MHCA4005. This close working with the supervisor, who will be an expert in your field of study, will foster the more specific research skills required for your subject. By successful completion of the course, you will be beginning to develop as an expert in your field.

Meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled on at least 8 occasions in the year (for full-time students) and approximately 4 (for part-time). The personal academic tutor is likely to be your supervisor. By combining teaching, independent study, academic support from Student Services and Library Services, and personal academic tutoring we seek to enable you to reflect on your progress and to build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you to flourish and be successful.

Contact time

In a typical week you will have around 0-7.5 contact hours of teaching. The precise contact hours will depend on the timetabling of modules and is variable. In the second half of the course you would expect to have less contact time in order to do more independent study around your research project.

Typically contact time will be structured around:

  • 1 taught module per week (2.5 or 5 hours, dependent on module). Modules will range from approximately 8-30 students.
  • Independent self-study, supported by meetings with a supervisor.

Independent self-study

In addition to direct contact time, you will be expected to undertake around 25 hours of personal self-study per week. Typically, this will involve research, data gathering, or writing either for the thesis preparation module or for the final research project. Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, our virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources.

Course duration

  • 1 year full-time
  • 2 years part-time

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. Please note that whilst we try to be as student-friendly as possible, scheduled teaching can take place on any day of the week; and some classes can be scheduled in the evenings.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose research, expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. In addition, the taught modules will be supported by a range of guest lecturers with expertise in each of the areas covered by the module.

The core team for the MRes includes subject experts details of whom can be found in the course handbook and on the Institute web pages. The majority of the lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or 'formative' assignments. Each module has one or more formal or 'summative' assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade. The assessment methods are designed to test out each of the core components of the major research project which will be the foundation of your MRes - e.g. literature review, methods, underlying paradigms, theories, and philosophies. The assessments include: a personal development plan; a literature review; an in-class individual presentation; an essay (or equivalent practice-based assignment); a sample chapter (or equivalent); an extended research project.

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback on examination performance is available upon request from the module leader. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

This course will help you to develop both intellectual and technical competencies in research. It will prepare you for academic careers by covering the fundamental components of academic research: developing a topic, literature review, method and analysis, and the planning and execution of a substantial piece of written or practical research. Through the 'apprenticeship' model, your work will be closely integrated with that of an expert supervisor and with an academic department giving you valuable experience of contributing to and working within a community of scholars. This will allow possible development towards further postgraduate research such as a PhD. From our first intake onto the MRes programme in 2016-17, two of our graduates went on to gain competitive, fully-funded 3 year PhD bursaries in the region.

An MRes in Design will also help you to progress towards a career in equivalent professional practice or research-based employment. This might might include, for example, working as a practicing artist, designer, illustrator, photographer, filmmaker etc, teaching, or working in a studio, in the media industries, or for an arts or heritage organisation, design publisher, or museum. In the context of an ever-expanding information economy, an MRes would prepare you for work in any organisation looking for literate and research trained staff. Further support will be available to you via the Research School's Student Researcher Development Programme. This provides workshops in, amongst other things, oral presentations, public engagement, writing CVs, bid writing, and entrepreneurial opportunities.

Education

A MPhil/MRes Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,599.
  • Duration 2 Years.

The Masters by Research in Education is an advanced postgraduate degree which can either be taken as a stand-alone qualification or as progression route into doctoral research.

The School of Education is one of the country’s major providers of education, training and research for the children’s workforce. We have a reputation for the highest quality provision, partnership working and delivery.

The Master by Research (MRes) programme provides an opportunity for students to gain a qualification centred on an intensive piece of research. This advanced postgraduate degree provides an exciting opportunity for in-depth understanding and exploration of the rich landscape of educational issues.

The ethos of the programme is based on developing the essential research knowledge and skills related to the broad field of education. All modules included on this degree are research focused and informed and centred on the development of the student as an independent researcher.

Overview

Key Features

  • Prepare for doctoral level study
  • Engage in a career in educational research in a range of educational contexts
  • Meet the global need for highly trained individuals who can make informed decisions on future research directions
  • Develop a critical approach to the analysis of data and interpretation of published research.

Our MRes in Education offers you:

Academic rigor: Gain a deeper understanding of your chosen subject area with a challenging combination of taught modules, research training and supervised research.

Wide variety of research interests: We have a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience enabling you to get the most out of both the taught and research element of your programme.

Excellent supervision: Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines. 

Resources: Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and to the state of the art Hive library facilities.

What will you study?

Course Content

The MRes in Education commences with a taught programme. You will be expected to take and pass three taught modules (described below) before proceeding to the research stage of your programme which will culminate in the production of a written thesis that will be examined by an oral exam (viva).

Processes and Skills, Management and Methods

This module is aimed at providing research students with the generic skills they will need to progress with and to complete their research degree. The module focuses on providing students with the skills to plan and manage their research project, to collect and manage their research data and to structure and write their thesis.

Approaches to educational research: methodologies and practicalities

This module focuses on the principles, procedures and processes associated with undertaking education research. Participants will engage with various research paradigms and methodologies, and the ideological, practical and ethical issues associated with education inquiry. Students will critically appraise various approaches to research, synthesising their understanding in a pilot research plan on a given educational research question.

MRes Education Research Thesis Preparation

This module prepares students for their specific MRes Research Thesis by the production of a Personal Development Plan (PDP) and training needs analysis in consultation with the Director of Studies (main research supervisor). A programme of student development and outcomes will be agreed that will then be carried out during the module.

How will you be taught?

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support through the personal academic tutoring system enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will enable you to flourish and be successful.

You are taught through a combination of face-to-face workshops, training courses (supported by workshop ‘packages’ accessed through Blackboard), seminars (online or face-to-face depending on mode of study) and one-to-one tutorials. In addition, meetings with personal academic tutors are scheduled at the beginning of the course and during each module as required.

Contact time

The precise number of contact hours will depend on the module, whether studying full- or part-time, and on the mode of study (i.e. face-to-face or online/distance). During the thesis module, contact time is reduced and is based on approximately one supervision session per month.  

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you are expected to undertake around 15-18 hours of personal self-study per week, depending on the module and mode of study. Typically, this will involve reading papers, books and reports in the substantive area of study, as well as books and articles relating to the chosen theoretical/conceptual and methodological approaches.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including the Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. 

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes members of staff from the Research School (module 1), as well as staff from the School of Education. 

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of ‘formative’ assignments. Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.  

Assessment methods include presentations, personal development plans (PDP) and assignments.

The precise assessment requirements for an individual student in an academic year will vary according to the modules taken, but a typical assessment pattern for the course is:

Module 1:

  • Researcher Development Plan based on their own personal training needs analysis (using Vitae’s ‘Getting Started in Research Lens’ as a starting point)
  • Literature Review for their chosen subject area that critically evaluates current research, synthesising clearly and coherently contemporary thinking to identify key issues
  • Project and Data Management Plan for the duration of their study that identifies activities and their critical path, milestones and any other important events that will impact on their research
  • 10-minute presentation to peers and academics setting out the current state of their proposal including a methodology section 

Module 2:

  • A poster representing the research design proposal    
  • A pilot research design in response to a given research question of relevance to the student’s interests and professional background, situating the study methodologically, and showing consideration for the ethical and practical aspects, depicted by assessment item 1

Module 3:

  • Initial Personal Development Plan    
  • A detailed critique of chosen methodological technique or theoretical approach

Module 4:

  • Interim evaluation where the student will make a presentation to a panel consisting of the supervisor(s) and at least one suitable internal advisor (after 3 months) Thesis (not to exceed 30,000 words)

Feedback

You will receive feedback on draft assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate.

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

Where could it take you?

You will meet the global need for highly trained individuals who can make informed decisions on future research directions.

Mathematics

A MPhil/MRes Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 1 Year.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Mathematics or Statistics.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

Overview

School of Science and the Environment

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our Mathematics staff have expertise in Bayesian Dynamic Generalised Linear Modelling, Statistical Modelling in Sport, Statistics Education, Combinatorial Optimisation, Evolutionary Computation, Sports Scheduling and Mathematical Modelling.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Supervision areas

The School of Science and the Environment has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our Mathematics staff have expertise in Bayesian Dynamic Generalised Linear Modelling, Statistical Modelling in Sport, Statistics Education, Combinatorial Optimisation, Evolutionary Computation, Sports Scheduling and Mathematical Modelling.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state-of-the-art library facilities. The Mathematics team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project, including access to the University’s brand new High Performance Computing facility and excellent links with all areas of the University for those interested in projects that cross over into other subject domains.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Please click on the name of the supervisor to follow a link to their webpage and find out more about their research interests and potential areas of PhD supervision. We recommend contacting a potential supervisor with your research outline before submitting a formal application, please read our guidelines for writing your research outline first. 

Dr Mark Johnston 
Expertise: combinatorial optimisation, evolutionary computation, sports scheduling, mathematical modelling.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional.At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Midwifery

A MPhil/MRes Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2020.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,680.
  • Duration 2 Years.

We welcome applications to undertake research towards MPhil and PhD degrees in Midwifery.

Research at Worcester has grown significantly in the last 10 years as the University itself has expanded. As a research student you will join a vibrant student community in our Research School and become part of our dynamic research environment.

Overview

Three Counties School of Nursing and Midwifery

The Three Counties School of Nursing and Midwifery has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in Clinical Midwifery Skills, supervision of midwives and governance issues, support of students within a diverse care settings, normality, high risk situations, and regulation.

What will you study?

PhD year by year

After receiving your application, we try to establish if we have the necessary expertise to supervise your project and we begin to form a supervisory team for you. This will normally consist of a Director of Studies (DoS), who will be your lead supervisor, and at least one other second supervisor, who will offer you additional support and guidance throughout your studies. If, following a successful interview, you are offered a place as a full-time student, your programme of study will look something like this:

First year

You will have submitted a draft research outline with your application. In your first six months, you will be working towards submitting a more complete research proposal, we call this an RDB1 Proposal. You will be aided in preparing for this by engaging with a 20-credit masters level module RTP401: Developing and Managing Your Research, and by meeting with your supervisory team to discuss your progress. You will meet with your supervisory team for 30 hours a year and this can be face-to-face or via Skype. Students who have not taken a recent research methods module in a relevant area will normally undertake a second module in their first year, in research methods. At the end of each year, beginning with your first year, you will work with your supervisors on completing a progress report, which we call an RDB7.

Second year

In your second year, you will be collecting data and working on your research project, under the supervision of your supervisors through regular meetings. In your second semester you will take a module titled RTP402: Dissemination, Impact and Engagement, which will help you begin to think about these three core themes. You may at this point have research papers ready to publish and you may wish to attend conferences to present your research to other experts in your field. You will be able to apply to our Research Student Support Scheme for some funding for this purpose (LINK). Students normally undergo Transfer from MPhil to PhD towards the end of their second year. At Transfer (RDB2), you will submit one to two chapters of your thesis and deliver a presentation to a question panel of experienced researchers.

Third and fourth year

In your third and fourth year, you will be writing up your thesis and preparing for your viva voce examination. This is an oral exam with two external examiners and a chair. You can also request that your supervisor be present at the exam. The exam will take place after you have submitted your final thesis. After the exam, it is not unusual for the examiners to ask that some minor amendments be made to your thesis before the final award is confirmed and you will have additional time to do this. It is possible to complete the course in three years, but we have found that the majority of students do take four years to complete the course.

Part time students follow the same structure as full time students but complete the PhD over a maximum period of six years.

Pathways

Students are allocated a pathway appropriate to their research experience and background.

Students without a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 1. This means you will need to engage with all of the modules outlined above and undertake associated assignments. These modules will lead to the additional award of PG Cert in Research Methods at no additional cost.

Students with a previous research degree will normally be allocated Pathway 2 and this will mean they will not be required to engage with the taught elements of the course to the same extent as students on Pathway 1. We do still recommend that they attend all of the workshops, for example, but they would not need to submit the associated assignments. Students on Pathway 2 may request to switch to Pathway 1 at the start of their course, with approval of their supervisory team.

Regardless of Pathway, the Researcher Development team organize a range of workshops that all students will be invited to attend.

How will you be supervised?

Benefit from a professional and challenging relationship with your supervisory team, drawn from experienced academics working at the forefront of their disciplines.

Supervision areas

The Three Counties School of Nursing and Midwifery has a strong mix of academics with a high degree of professional and personal experience, enabling you to get the most out of your programme. Our staff have expertise in Clinical Midwifery Skills, supervision of midwives and governance issues, support of students within a diverse care settings, normality, high risk situations, and regulation.

Resources

Access to the University of Worcester’s virtual resources and its state-of-the-art library facilities. The Midwifery team at Worcester have an excellent range of resources available to support your learning and your research project. The School of Nursing and Midwifery has a state-of-the-art clinical skills and simulation centre that is staffed by three dedicated clinical skills technicians. Simulation suites include: hospital, therapy and home environments that are designed to mimic real life settings so that students can practice in realistic healthcare surroundings. The simulation suites are fitted with video recording equipment which is controlled from a central control room.

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document for the MPhil or PhD.

Supervisors

Please click on the name of the supervisor to follow a link to their webpage and find out more about their research interests and potential areas of PhD supervision. We recommend contacting a potential supervisor with your research outline before submitting a formal application, please read our guidelines for writing your research outline first.

Professor Mary Nolan 
Expertise: education and support for mothers, fathers and families across the transition to parenthood; universal and targeted parent education; couple relationships education for the first two years of parenting; building mothers’ and fathers’ relationship with their unborn and newborn baby; engaging new fathers in postnatal care; women’s and men’s experiences of early labour; knowledge of early brain development among young people prior to parenthood.

Where could it take you?

All research students must engage with the Researcher Development Programme (RDP), a core curriculum of training and development which provides them with the general and subject-specific knowledge, skills and behaviours to support them in the completion of their research degree. At the beginning of an MPhil/PhD degree, you will be allocated to one of two pathways depending on your experience and knowledge as a researcher. This will determine which elements of the programme are core and which are optional. At the beginning of the programme you will be required to complete a Training Needs Analysis (TNA) in conjunction with your Director of Studies. This identifies the training that you will need to undertake, in addition to the mandatory elements of RDP, in order to complete the programme and to become an effective researcher. This TNA is revisited at the beginning of each subsequent academic year. All students are offered a wide range of optional training workshops throughout the programme focused around the following themes:

  • Developing and Managing Your Research
  • Dissemination, Impact, Engagement
  • Completing Your Research Degree
  • Research Methodology Master classes
  • Data Analysis
  • Research Funding
  • Wellbeing and Personal Effectiveness
  • Careers and Employability
  • Enterprise and Entrepreneurship
Employment Law

A Postgraduate Diploma Program offered by University of Worcester .

  • Deadline is Aug 3, 2020.
  • Start Date is Sep 9, 2019.
  • Teaching languages are English.
  • Price $17,599.
  • Duration 1 Year.

What makes the LLM in Employment Law at Worcester special?

Designed with practising legal and HR professionals in mind, this course allows you to develop specialist areas of expertise while gaining a full Masters qualification.

At Worcester you will engage in depth with the key aspects of UK Employment Law. You will gain a detailed and critical understanding of the main legislation and case law including current theoretical debates on how the law does and should operate.

The course has a practical, real world focus and includes an opportunity for you to engage with the use of the law in the University’s Legal Advice Centre.

To help you with your dissertation, you will receive expert guidance on a legal research topic of your choice from experienced legal academics and professionals. 

As well as gaining a greater knowledge and understanding of Employment Law, you will be able to enhance and develop many transferable skills such as legal research, critical thinking and analysis, problem solving, academic writing, oral communication and networking.

You will be encouraged to discuss and share ideas and viewpoints with other students and your tutors and to debate what the law is and whether it needs reform.

Overview

Key features

  • Flexible delivery enabling you to study while you work and gain a Masters degree to boost your employability and professional career prospects
  • Allows you to gain practical experience in Employment Law at the University Legal Advice Centre
  • A key focus on the law in practice including detailed study of Employment Tribunals and Alternative Dispute Resolution
  • Taught by a combination of experienced practising lawyers including specialist employment lawyers and legal academics with guest speakers
  • Enables you to engage in in-depth research into areas of interest or current practice.
  • A voluntary guided visit to a local Employment Tribunal to see the law in action

LLM in Employment Law Information Session

Interested in continuing your studies to get a Master's degree in Law? We are holding an Information Session on the afternoon of Thursday 15 August 2019 here at the School of Law.

Book onto our LLM in Employment Law Information Session for more information.

How will you be taught?

You are taught through a combination of interactive workshops, lectures, seminars and supervisory tutorials. Interactive workshops take a variety of formats and are intended to enable the application of learning through discussion and small group activities.  Seminars enable the discussion and development of understanding of topics covered in lectures, are focused on developing subject specific skills and applied individual and group project work.

The University places emphasis on enabling students to develop the independent learning capabilities that will equip you for lifelong learning and future employment, as well as academic achievement.  A mixture of independent study, teaching and academic support from Student Services and Library Services, enables you to reflect on progress and build up a profile of skills, achievements and experiences that will help you to flourish and be successful.

In addition to the formal scheduled delivery of the course you will have the opportunity to engage fully in the life of the School of Law including attending and participating in research seminars and conferences.

Contact time

The total amount of study time on this course is calculated with reference to the module credit, meaning that 180 credits equates to 1800 hours of study time in total.  By the very nature of this course, much of this time is taken up with independent self-study. 

Typically the taught modules will contain the following contact time:

  • 30 credit modules - 12 weekly two hour workshops.
  • 15 credit modules - 6 weekly two hour workshops.

The research modules contain the following contact time: 

  • The Legal Research Methods Course includes 4 three hour interactive workshops at the start of the module and 6 hours of scheduled supervisory sessions.
  • The Dissertation module includes 2 three hour workshop at the start of the module and 12 hours of scheduled supervisory sessions. These can be delivered face to face or at a distance.

Independent self-study

In addition to the contact time, you will be expected to undertake over 1668 hours of personal self-study over the year. Typically, this will involve completing online activities, reading journal articles and books, working on individual and group projects, undertaking research in the library and online, preparing coursework assignments and presentations.

Independent learning is supported by a range of excellent learning facilities, including The Hive and library resources, the virtual learning environment, and extensive electronic learning resources. 

Duration

  • 12 months Full Time
  • 24 months Part Time

Timetables

Timetables are normally available one month before registration. All taught classes take place in the evening.

Teaching staff

You will be taught by a teaching team whose expertise and knowledge are closely matched to the content of the modules on the course. The team includes senior academics and legal practitioners with a range of private and public law specialisms.

Teaching is informed by the research and consultancy, and currently 85% of course lecturers have a higher education teaching qualification or are Fellows of the Higher Education Academy.

Assessment

The course provides opportunities to test understanding and learning informally through the completion of practice or ‘formative’ assignments. 

Each module has one or more formal or ‘summative’ assessments which are graded and count towards the overall module grade.  Assessment methods include a range of coursework assessments such as essays, reports, portfolios, presentations, a research proposal and a dissertation.

Typically your assessment diet over the year would include

Semester 1

1 Research Proposal       
2 Assignments (Essays)   
1 Presentation     
1 Client Interviewing (Practical Assessment)

Semester 2       

2 Assignments (Essays)    
1 Portfolio     
1 Tribunal Report     
1 Client Interviewing (Practical Assessment)

Semester 3  

1 Dissertation

You will receive feedback on practice assessments and on formal assessments undertaken by coursework. Feedback is intended to support learning and you are encouraged to discuss it with personal academic tutors and module tutors as appropriate. 

We aim to provide you with feedback on formal course work assessments within 20 working days of hand-in.  

Programme specification

For comprehensive details on the aims and intended learning outcomes of the course, and the means by which these are achieved through learning, teaching and assessment, please download the latest programme specification document.

School of Law

The teaching team is made up of barristers, solicitors and legal academics with a range of research interests and professional experience. All the team are highly experienced lecturers and active researchers in their areas.

Students in the School of Law will be taught by lecturers who are not only experienced and highly motivated teachers but also legal academic experts in their fields.

Where could it take you?

Students are encouraged to take part in the full range of law employability activities at Worcester. Employability is at the heart the School of Law, and we offer a wide range of opportunities to gain work experience through volunteering, mentoring schemes and placements.

We work closely with a variety of local, regional and national firms and use their expertise to input into the academic curriculum. In this way, we ensure that your Master’s degree is attractive to potential employers and that you have the opportunity to explore many different career options, both in the legal profession and in other areas, such as business and management. 

Stay up-to-daye